Operational Manual For Alphenix 2b308-307en
Operational Manual For Alphenix 2b308-307en
2B308-307EN
OPERATION MANUAL
FOR
INTERVENTIONAL ANGIOGRAPHY SYSTEM
IMPORTANT!
Read and understand this manual before operating
the equipment. After reading, keep this manual in an
easily accessible place.
Issued: 2020-01
Introduction
This operation manual describes the operating procedures for Alphenix
INFX-8000F/B, INFX-8000F/Y, INFX-8000F/P (*1) interventional
angiography systems. To ensure safe and correct operation of the system,
read the operation manual carefully and obtain a good understanding of the
system before starting operation.
Trademarks
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Alphenix is a trademark of Canon Medical Systems Corporation.
This manual may include trademarks and registered trademarks of other companies.
Note that the ™ mark and the mark may or may not be used in this manual.
IMPORTANT!
2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice
and without legal obligation.
3. The contents of this manual are correct to the best of our knowledge.
Please inform us of any ambiguous or erroneous descriptions, missing
information, etc.
No. 2B308-307EN
Intellectual Property
(1) The software and related documents must be used only for this system.
(2) The intellectual property of this software and related documents is not
assigned to you.
(3) You must not copy the software or documents, nor modify the software in
whole or in part.
(5) You must not assign, disclose, transfer, or sublicense the software or
documents to a third party.
(6) The software is subject to the U.S. and Japanese Export Administration
Laws and Regulations and you must not export or re-export the software in
whole or in part unless properly authorized by the U.S. or Japanese
government.
(7) The information in the documents, or programs in the software are subject to
change without notice.
(8) The licensor shall have no liability for any express or implied warranties or
any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, or consequential damages related
to the software and related documents.
No. 2B308-307EN
3
Last updated November 2018
IF YOU LIVE IN (OR IF YOUR PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS IS IN) THE UNITED
STATES, PLEASE READ THE BINDING ARBITRATION CLAUSE AND CLASS ACTION
WAIVER IN SECTION 8. IT AFFECTS HOW DISPUTES ARE RESOLVED.
Depending on how you obtained the Windows software, this is a license agreement between
(i) you and the device manufacturer or software installer that distributes the software with your
device; or (ii) you and Microsoft Corporation (or, based on where you live or if a business where
your principal place of business is located, one of its affiliates) if you acquired the software from
a retailer. Microsoft is the device manufacturer for devices produced by Microsoft or one of its
affiliates, and Microsoft is the retailer if you acquired the software directly from Microsoft.
This agreement describes your rights and the conditions upon which you may use the Windows
software. You should review the entire agreement, including any supplemental license terms
that accompany the software and any linked terms, because all of the terms are important and
together create this agreement that applies to you. You can review linked terms by pasting the
(aka.ms/) link into a browser window.
By accepting this agreement or using the software, you agree to all of these terms, and
consent to the transmission of certain information during activation and during your use
of the software as per the privacy statement described in Section 3. If you do not accept
and comply with these terms, you may not use the software or its features. You may
contact the device manufacturer or installer, or your retailer if you purchased the software
directly, to determine its return policy and return the software or device for a refund or credit
under that policy. You must comply with that policy, which might require you to return the
software with the entire device on which the software is installed for a refund or credit, if any.
1. Overview.
(i) Some Windows apps provide an access point to, or rely on, online services,
and the use of those services is sometimes governed by separate terms and
privacy policies, such as the Microsoft Services Agreement at (aka.ms/msa).
You can view these terms and policies by looking at the service terms of use
or the app’s settings, as applicable; please read them. The services may not
be available in all regions.
(ii) The manufacturer or installer may also preinstall apps, which will be subject
to separate license terms.
No. 2B308-307EN
4
(iii) The software may include third party software such as Adobe Flash Player
that is licensed under its own terms. You agree that your use of Adobe Flash
Player is governed by the license terms for Adobe Systems Incorporated at
(aka.ms/adobeflash). Adobe and Flash are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
(iv) The software may include third party programs that are licensed to you under
this agreement, or under their own terms. License terms, notices and
acknowledgements, if any, for the third party program can be view at
(aka.ms/thirdpartynotices).
a. License. The software license is permanently assigned to the device with which
you acquired the software. You many only use the software on that device.
c. Restrictions. The manufacturer or installer and Microsoft reserve all rights (such as
rights under intellectual property laws) not expressly granted in this agreement. For
example, this license does not give you any right to, and you may not:
(ii) publish, copy (other than the permitted backup copy), rent, lease, or lend the
software;
(v) use the software as server software, for commercial hosting, make the
software available for simultaneous use by multiple users over a network,
install the software on a server and allow users to access it remotely, or
install the software on a device for use only by remote users;
(vii) when using Internet-based features you may not use those features in any
way that could interfere with anyone else’s use of them, or to try to gain
access to or use any service, data, account, or network, in an unauthorized
manner.
No. 2B308-307EN
5
d. Multi use scenarios.
(i) Multiple versions. If when acquiring the software, you were provided with
multiple versions (such as 32-bit and 64-bit versions), you may install and
activate only one of those versions at a time.
(iii) Device connections. You may allow up to 20 other devices to access the
software installed on the licensed device for the purpose of using the
following software features: file services, print services, Internet information
services, and Internet connection sharing and telephony services on the
licensed device. The 20 connection limit applies to devices that access the
software indirectly through “multiplexing” or other software or hardware that
pools connections. You may allow any number of devices to access the
software on the licensed device to synchronize data between devices. This
section does not mean, however, that you have the right to install the
software, or use the primary function of the software (other than the features
listed in this section), on any of these other devices.
(iv) Remote access. Users may access the licensed device from another device
using remote access technologies, but only on devices separately licensed to
run the same or higher edition of this software.
(v) Remote assistance. You may use remote assistance technologies to share
an active session without obtaining any additional licenses for the software.
Remote assistance allows one user to connect directly to another user’s
computer, usually to correct problems.
(vi) POS application. If the software is installed on a retail point of service device,
you may use the software with a point of service application (“POS
Application”). A POS Application is a software application which provides only
the following functions: (i) process sales and service transactions, scan and
track inventory, record and/or transmit customer information, and perform
related management functions, and/or (ii) provide information directly and
indirectly to customers about available products and services. You may use
other programs with the software as long as the other programs: (i) directly
support the manufacturer’s specific use for the device, or (ii) provide system
utilities, resource management, or anti-virus or similar protection. For
clarification purposes, an automated teller machine (“ATM”) is not a retail
point of service device.
(viii) Desktop Functions. If your system performs desktop functions, then you
must ensure that they: (i) are only used to support the application, and
(ii) operate only when used with the application.
No. 2B308-307EN
6
e. Windows 10 IoT Enterprise Features for Development and Testing Only
(i) Windows 10 Containers. You may only use Windows 10 Containers for
commercial purposes and activities with Microsoft Azure IoT Edge. You may
use any number of virtual operating system environments instantiated as
Windows 10 Containers by the Microsoft Azure IoT Edge Runtime on the
device.
(ii) Device Health Attestation. You may only implement Device Health
Attestation in a commercial use if you execute a Microsoft Windows IoT Core
Services Agreement at:
https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/services/windows-10-iot-core/.
f. Specific Use. The manufacturer designed the licensed device for a specific use.
You may only use the software for that use.
3. Privacy; Consent to Use of Data. Your privacy is important to us. Some of the software
features send or receive information when using those features. Many of these features
can be switched off in the user interface, or you can choose not to use them. By accepting
this agreement and using the software you agree that Microsoft may collect, use, and
disclose the information as described in the Microsoft Privacy Statement available at
(aka.ms/privacy), and as may be described in the user interface associated with the
software features.
4. Authorized Software and Activation. You are authorized to use this software only if you
are properly licensed and the software has been properly activated with a genuine
product key or by other authorized method. When you connect to the Internet while using
the software, the software will automatically contact Microsoft or its affiliate to confirm the
software is genuine and the license is associated with the licensed device. You can also
activate the software manually by Internet or telephone. In either case, transmission of
certain information will occur, and Internet, telephone and SMS service charges may
apply. During activation (or reactivation that may be triggered by changes to your device’s
components), the software may determine that the installed instance of the software is
counterfeit, improperly licensed or includes unauthorized changes. If activation fails the
software will attempt to repair itself by replacing any tampered Microsoft software with
genuine Microsoft software. You may also receive reminders to obtain a proper license for
the software. Successful activation does not confirm that the software is genuine or
properly licensed. You may not bypass or circumvent activation. To help determine if your
software is genuine and whether you are properly licensed, see (aka.ms/genuine). Certain
updates, support, and other services might only be offered to users of genuine Microsoft
software.
5. Updates. You may obtain updates only from Microsoft or authorized sources, and
Microsoft may need to update your system to provide you with those updates. The
software periodically checks for system and app updates, and may download and install
them for you. To the extent automatic updates are enabled on your device, by accepting
this agreement, you agree to receive these types of automatic updates without any
additional notice.
6. Geographic and Export Restrictions. If your software is restricted for use in a particular
geographic region, then you may activate the software only in that region. You must also
comply with all domestic and international export laws and regulations that apply to the
software, which include restrictions on destinations, end users, and end use. For further
information on geographic and export restrictions, visit (aka.ms/georestrict) and
(aka.ms/exporting).
No. 2B308-307EN
7
7. Support and Refund Procedures. For the software generally, contact the device
manufacturer or installer for support options. Refer to the support number provided with
the software. For updates and supplements obtained directly from Microsoft, Microsoft
may provide limited support services for properly licensed software as described at
(aka.ms/mssupport). If you are seeking a refund, contact the manufacturer or installer to
determine its refund policies. You must comply with those policies, which might require
you to return the software with the entire device on which the software is installed for a
refund.
8. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver if You Live in (or if a Business Your
Principal Place of Business is in) the United States.
We hope we never have a dispute, but if we do, you and we agree to try for 60 days to
resolve it informally. If we can’t, you and we agree to binding individual arbitration
before the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”) under the Federal Arbitration
Act (“FAA”), and not to sue in court in front of a judge or jury. Instead, a neutral
arbitrator will decide and the arbitrator’s decision will be final except for a limited right of
appeal under the FAA. Class action lawsuits, class-wide arbitrations, private
attorney-general actions, and any other proceeding where someone acts in a
representative capacity aren’t allowed. Nor is combining individual proceedings
without the consent of all parties. “We,” “our,” and “us” includes Microsoft, the device
manufacturer, and software installer.
b. Mail a Notice of Dispute first. If you have a dispute and our customer service
representatives can’t resolve it, send a Notice of Dispute by U.S. Mail to the
manufacturer or installer, ATTN: LEGAL DEPARTMENT. If your dispute is with
Microsoft, mail it to Microsoft Corporation, ATTN: LCA ARBITRATION, One
Microsoft Way, Redmond, WA 98052-6399. Tell us your name, address, how to
contact you, what the problem is, and what you want. A form is available at
(aka.ms/disputeform). We’ll do the same if we have a dispute with you. After
60 days, you or we may start an arbitration if the dispute is unresolved.
c. Small claims court option. Instead of mailing a Notice of Dispute, and if you meet
the court’s requirements, you may sue us in small claims court in your county of
residence (or if a business your principal place of business) or our principal place of
business–King County, Washington USA if your dispute is with Microsoft. We hope
you’ll mail a Notice of Dispute and give us 60 days to try to work it out, but you don’t
have to before going to small claims court.
d. Arbitration procedure. The AAA will conduct any arbitration under its Commercial
Arbitration Rules (or if you are an individual and use the software for personal or
household use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 USD or less whether or not
you are an individual or how you use the software, its Consumer Arbitration Rules).
For more information, see (aka.ms/adr) or call 1-800-778-7879. To start an
arbitration, submit the form available at (aka.ms/arbitration) to the AAA; mail a copy
to the manufacturer or installer (or to Microsoft if your dispute is with Microsoft). In a
dispute involving $25,000 USD or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. Any in-person
hearing will take place in your county of residence (of if a business your principal
place of business) or our principal place of business—King County, Washington if
your dispute is with Microsoft. You choose. The arbitrator may award the same
damages to you individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory
or injunctive relief only to you individually to satisfy your individual claim.
No. 2B308-307EN
8
e. Arbitration fees and payments.
(i) Disputes involving $75,000 USD or less. The manufacturer or installer (or
Microsoft if your dispute is with Microsoft) will promptly reimburse your filing
fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject our
last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed, your
dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and
the arbitrator awards you more than this last written offer, the manufacturer or
installer (or Microsoft if your dispute is with Microsoft) will: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000 USD; (2) pay your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any;
and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs)
that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and
pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts
unless you and we agree on them.
(ii) Disputes involving more than $75,000 USD. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
(iii) Disputes involving any amount. If you start an arbitration we won’t seek our
AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or your filing fees we reimbursed,
unless the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper
purpose. If we start an arbitration we will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s
fees and expenses. We won’t seek our attorney’s fees or expenses from you
in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
f. Must file within one year. You and we must file in small claims court or arbitration
any claim or dispute (except intellectual property disputes — see Section 8.a.)
within one year from when it first could be filed. Otherwise, it’s permanently barred.
h. Conflict with AAA rules. This agreement governs if it conflicts with the AAA’s
Commercial Arbitration Rules or Consumer Arbitration Rules.
9. Governing Law. The laws of the state or country where you live (or if a business where
your principal place of business is located) govern all claims and disputes concerning the
software, its price, or this agreement, including breach of contract claims and claims
under state consumer protection laws, unfair competition laws, implied warranty laws, for
unjust enrichment, and in tort, regardless of conflict of law principles. In the United States,
the FAA governs all provisions relating to arbitration.
10. Consumer Rights, Regional Variations. This agreement describes certain legal rights.
You may have other rights, including consumer rights, under the laws of your state or
country. You may also have rights with respect to the party from which you acquired the
software. This agreement does not change those other rights if the laws of your state or
country do not permit it to do so. For example, if you acquired the software in one of the
below regions, or mandatory country law applies, then the following provisions apply to
you:
No. 2B308-307EN
9
a. Australia. References to “Limited Warranty” are references to the express warranty
provided by Microsoft or the manufacturer or installer. This warranty is given in
addition to other rights and remedies you may have under law, including your rights
and remedies in accordance with the statutory guarantees under the Australian
Consumer Law.
In this section, “goods” refers to the software for which Microsoft or the
manufacturer or installer provides the express warranty. Our goods come with
guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are
entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any
other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the
goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the
failure does not amount to a major failure.
b. Canada. You may stop receiving updates on your device by turning off Internet
access. If and when you re-connect to the Internet, the software will resume
checking for and installing updates.
c. European Union. The academic use restriction in Section 10.d(i) below does not
apply in the jurisdictions listed on this site: (aka.ms/academicuse).
a. Networks, data and Internet usage. Some features of the software and services
accessed through the software may require your device to access the Internet. Your
access and usage (including charges) may be subject to the terms of your cellular
or internet provider agreement. Certain features of the software may help you
access the Internet more efficiently, but the software’s usage calculations may be
different from your service provider’s measurements. You are always responsible
for (i) understanding and complying with the terms of your own plans and
agreements, and (ii) any issues arising from using or accessing networks, including
public/open networks. You may use the software to connect to networks, and to
share access information about those networks, only if you have permission to do
so.
No. 2B308-307EN
10
b. H.264/AVC and MPEG-4 visual standards and VC-1 video standards. The
software may include H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and/or VC-1 decoding technology.
MPEG LA, L.L.C. requires this notice:
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC, THE VC-1, AND THE MPEG-4
PART 2 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSES FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE STANDARDS (“VIDEO STANDARDS”)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC, VC-1, AND MPEG-4 PART 2 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE SUCH VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE WWW.MPEGLA.COM
c. Malware protection. Microsoft cares about protecting your device from malware.
The software will turn on malware protection if other protection is not installed or
has expired. To do so, other antimalware software will be disabled or may have to
be removed.
12. Entire Agreement. This agreement (together with the printed paper license terms or
other terms accompanying any software supplements, updates, and services that are
provided by the manufacturer or installer, or Microsoft, and that you use), and the terms
contained in web links listed in this agreement, are the entire agreement for the software
and any such supplements, updates, and services (unless the manufacturer or installer,
or Microsoft, provides other terms with such supplements, updates, or services). You can
review this agreement after your software is running by going to (aka.ms/useterms) or
going to Settings - System - About within the software. You can also review the terms at
any of the links in this agreement by typing the URLs into a browser address bar, and you
agree to do so. You agree that you will read the terms before using the software or
services, including any linked terms. You understand that by using the software and
services, you ratify this agreement and the linked terms. There are also informational links
in this agreement. The links containing notices and binding terms are:
No. 2B308-307EN
11
***********************************************************************
NO WARRANTY
THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR DEVICE (INCLUDING THE APPS) IS LICENSED “AS IS.” TO
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY YOUR LOCAL LAWS, YOU BEAR THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE SOFTWARE’S QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE. SHOULD IT PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL SERVICING OR REPAIR. NEITHER
THE DEVICE MANUFACTURER NOR MICROSOFT GIVES ANY EXPRESS WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, OR CONDITIONS FOR THE SOFTWARE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
UNDER YOUR LOCAL LAWS, THE MANUFACTURER AND MICROSOFT EXCLUDE ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, INCLUDING THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY,
QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. YOU MAY
HAVE ADDITIONAL CONSUMER RIGHTS OR STATUTORY GUARANTEES UNDER LOCAL
LAWS THAT THESE TERMS CANNOT CHANGE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY YOUR LOCAL LAWS, IF YOU HAVE ANY BASIS
FOR RECOVERING DAMAGES, YOU CAN RECOVER FROM THE MANUFACTURER OR
MICROSOFT ONLY DIRECT DAMAGES UP TO THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE
SOFTWARE (OR UP TO $50 USD IF YOU ACQUIRED THE SOFTWARE FOR NO CHARGE).
YOU WILL NOT, AND WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO, SEEK TO RECOVER ANY OTHER DAMAGES
OR REMEDY, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS AND DIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL,
INDIRECT, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, UNDER ANY PART OF THIS AGREEMENT OR
UNDER ANY THEORY. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO (I) ANYTHING RELATED TO THIS
AGREEMENT, THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING THE APPS), THE DEVICE, SERVICES,
CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE DATA,
CONTENT (INCLUDING CODE) ON THIRD PARTY INTERNET SITES OR THIRD PARTY
PROGRAMS, AND (II) CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, GUARANTEE,
OR CONDITION; STRICT LIABILITY, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHER TORT; VIOLATION OF A
STATUTE OR REGULATION; UNJUST ENRICHMENT; OR UNDER ANY OTHER THEORY.
Check with your device manufacturer to determine if your device is covered by a warranty.
No. 2B308-307EN
12
How to Use This Operation Manual
For the operating procedures for optional units and units manufactured by
companies other than Canon Medical Systems (such as the TV monitor and
the monitor suspension unit), refer to the operation manual supplied with
each applicable unit.
Configuration System
Cardiac Angiography system for cardiac vessels
configuration This system is referred to as the "SP cardiac system" in this manual.
The model names with supplemental symbols are:
INFX-8000F/B5 for the USA, INFX-8000F/P5 for Canada,
Single-plane INFX-8000F/Y5 for countries other than the USA and Canada
system (*1) Vascular Angiography system for vessels in the head, abdomen, and lower
(SP system) configuration extremities
This system is referred to as the "SP vascular system" in this manual.
The model names with supplemental symbols are:
INFX-8000F/B7 for the USA, INFX-8000F/P7 for Canada,
INFX-8000F/Y7 for countries other than the USA and Canada
System composed of the following two systems
Cardiac Angiography system for cardiac vessels
configuration This system is referred to as the "DP cardiac system" in this manual.
The model names with supplemental symbols are:
INFX-8000F/BG for the USA, INFX-8000F/PG for Canada,
Dual-plane
system (*2) INFX-8000F/YG for countries other than the USA and Canada
(DP system) Vascular Angiography system for vessels in the head, abdomen, and lower
configuration extremities
This system is referred to as the "DP vascular system" in this manual.
The model names with supplemental symbols are:
INFX-8000F/BH for the USA, INFX-8000F/PH for Canada,
INFX-8000F/YH for countries other than the USA and Canada
No. 2B308-307EN
13
2. Outline of Each Section of This Operation Manual
Section Contents
1 Intended purpose of the system
2 System components and optional units
3 System operating requirements (environmental/power
requirements)
4 Name and functions of each section of the system
5 Safety mechanisms of the system
6 Mounting accessories/options for the system
7 Pre-operational checks and post-operational checks
8 Turning the power of the system ON/OFF
9 Operating units installed in the examination room (support unit,
catheterization table, etc.)
10 Making an appointment, starting a study, and completing a study
11 Fluoroscopy/radiography
12 Image playback
13 Image processing during a study
14 Archiving the acquired image data
15 Image processing after a study
16 Printing the acquired images
17 Moving/storing the system
18 System maintenance (inspection, cleaning, disinfection, etc.)
19 Specifications of the system and system components
20 Technical data required by the following standards
IEC 60601-2-43
IEC 60601-1-3
IEC 60601-1-2
DHHS 21CFR § 1020
21 Error messages and corrective actions
No. 2B308-307EN
14
3. Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
ABC Automatic brightness control
EP Electrophysiological
FOV Field of view
The FOV can be changed by switching the input surface size
of the X-ray detector (FPD).
FPD Flat panel detector
FPS (f/s) Frames per second
Unit of acquisition rate for radiography and unit of pulse rate
for fluoroscopy.
Note that the unit used in this system is f/s.
IVR Interventional radiology
LIH Last image hold
Used to display the last image of a fluoroscopy session as a
still image.
MIH Map Image Hold
A map image displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor
immediately after fluoroscopy is completed.
PCI Percutaneous coronary intervention
RAID Redundant array of independent disks
An array of hard disks is used to guard against data loss and
to increase the file saving and reading speeds.
Image files are stored in the RAID.
ROI Region of interest
SEC Super Exposure Control
Automatic X-ray condition setting function
SID Source-to-image distance
Distance from the X-ray source to the FPD input surface
SSD Source-to-skin distance
Distance from the X-ray source to the patient surface
No. 2B308-307EN
15
4. Documents for Service Engineers
The technical documents provided for use by service engineers are listed in
the table below.
No. 2B308-307EN
16
Table of Contents
2. Composition ........................................................................................ 67
2.1 Outline............................................................................................................... 68
2.2 System Components .............................................................................. 70
No. 2B308-307EN
17
3.3 Installation Conditions ......................................................................... 82
No. 2B308-307EN
18
5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown
Mode ................................................................................................................. 166
6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand ........... 185
6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm) ................................................ 186
No. 2B308-307EN
19
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band
(CAT-880B)................................................................................................... 196
No. 2B308-307EN
20
9.7 Operating the Tablet Console (Option) .................................. 267
11. Fluoroscopy/Radiography
(Acquisition Mode) ................................................................... 313
11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode ............................................................ 316
No. 2B308-307EN
21
12. Image Playback ............................................................................. 365
12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image ..................................... 367
No. 2B308-307EN
22
18.7 Disposal of the System ...................................................................... 409
No. 2B308-307EN
23
21. System Message Display................................................. 491
21.1 Message Display Section.................................................................. 492
No. 2B308-307EN
24
Safety Precautions
In addition to the above, the signal word NOTE is used to indicate other
important information.
NOTE Indicates reference information that enables more efficient use of the
equipment.
No. 2B308-307EN
25
3. Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions to ensure the safety of patients and
operators. In addition to the following precautions, the precautions specific
to each operation are described in the corresponding sections of this manual.
Be sure to observe these specific precautions as well.
• In order to reduce the exposure dose to regions that are not applicable,
limit the X-ray exposure field to the applicable region using the beam
limiting device.
No. 2B308-307EN
26
WARNING: 2. Minimize the X-ray exposure of personnel engaged in clinical treatment
(physicians, radiological technologists, nurses, etc.) by taking
adequate X-ray protective measures such as ensuring that X-ray
protective aprons or X-ray protective plates are used. For the
protective equipment that can be used with this system, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
5. If 90% or more of the total heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube
anode is used, stop X-ray generation. If the X-ray tube assembly is
used under extreme conditions, the service life of the X-ray tube
assembly will be reduced.
If fluoroscopy is performed continuously in this status, when the heat
storage capacity reaches the maximum level, X-ray generation is
forcibly stopped. The heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube anode
can be checked on the system monitor or fluoroscopic monitor.
• Take special care to prevent the support unit from interfering with the
patient and other persons in the examination room.
• Take special care to prevent the support unit and the catheterization
table from interfering with peripheral units or devices such as contrast
medium injectors, monitors, and monitor suspension units. In
particular, the lower section of the tabletop of the catheterization table
is obstructed from view and therefore great care is required.
• Take care to prevent interference between the support unit and the
catheterization table. In particular, pay special attention to the objects
that are mounted to the catheterization table, such as the tabletop, the
armrest, etc.
No. 2B308-307EN
27
WARNING: 8. When using map images, confirm that the images created from the
images acquired during the previous study are no longer displayed on
the reference monitor. If the images are identified incorrectly,
misdiagnosis will result.
The related information for the displayed image can be checked in the
Examination Date display field of the Image-Related Information
display area on the reference monitor.
11. If smoke is generated from the system, be careful not to breathe the
smoke or expose your eyes to it.
The gases generated may include components that can irritate the
mucous lining. If you feel irritation to your eyes or throat, immediately
wash them. If you still feel irritation, consult a physician.
12. If a liquid such as coolant leaks from the system, immediately contact
your Canon Medical Systems representative without touching the
liquid. Touching such liquids may cause skin irritation.
If such a liquid comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected
area with soap and rinse it with copious amounts of water. If the skin
irritation continues even after washing, consult a physician.
No. 2B308-307EN
28
WARNING: 14. The use of radiowave-emitting devices such as cell phones near this
equipment may interfere with its operation. Do not bring devices which
generate radio waves, such as cell phones, transceivers, and radio-
controlled toys, into the room where the equipment is installed, and do
not place such devices near the equipment. If devices which generate
radio waves are brought near the equipment, instruct the user to
immediately turn OFF the radiowave-emitting device.
16. Do not use cables and parts other than those provided with this
system. If other cables or parts are used, the emission performance or
immunity performance may be adversely affected, causing the system
to malfunction.
WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead
compounds, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer, and phthalates, which are known to the State of California to
cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.
For more information go to www.p65warnings.ca.gov.
No. 2B308-307EN
29
CAUTION: 1. Only the standard units and optional units specified in this operation
manual can be used in combination with this system.
If units other than those specified are used in combination, fire, electric
shock, failure, or malfunction may result.
No. 2B308-307EN
30
CAUTION: 5. The security software McAfee Embedded Control (MEC) by McAfee,
Inc. has been installed in this equipment. MEC is whitelist-type
security software. MEC prevents execution of malware by only
allowing activation of executable files registered in the whitelist for the
equipment. However, even with MEC installed, it is possible for the
equipment to be infected with malware. The user must establish
security measures to prevent equipment from being infected.
(a) Perform appropriate access control for the area where the system
is installed so that the system cannot be operated by unauthorized
persons.
When registering users in this system, pay careful attention to
user management by assigning rights appropriate to their
positions.
(c) This system collects access logs for the purpose of identifying
persons who have accessed data. These access logs are
extremely useful for investigating unauthorized operation.
Pay careful attention to prevent unauthorized system operation by
storing the access logs properly and performing periodic checks
to detect unauthorized use.
8. If the system is not being used (for example, while you are away from
the system), be sure not to leave information displayed on the screen.
Use the screen locking function or log off from the system.
To use this function, it is necessary to enable the security functions.
No. 2B308-307EN
31
CAUTION: 10. If any system abnormality is found or system malfunction occurs, turn
OFF the power of the system, post a sign reading "DO NOT USE" on
the system, and contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative for inspection and repair.
11. Before using the system, be sure that you fully understand the features
of the FPD.
(c) Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming
studies after several hours has elapsed since the system power
was turned OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait for at
least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning
ON the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear before starting the study.
12. To minimize X-ray exposure to the patient, ensure that the SSD
(source-to-skin distance) is as great as possible when performing
fluoroscopy/radiography.
13. If objects (even those that may be required for examination) are placed
within the X-ray beam, adverse effects such as scattered radiation will
result.
15. To ensure that the patient does not fall from the catheterization table,
closely observe the patient at all times.
16. Do not place any objects on units such as the support unit or monitor
suspension unit, which are near the patient. If such objects fall off,
they may hit the patient.
No. 2B308-307EN
32
CAUTION: 17. When the support unit is near the patient, operate the support unit at
the slow speed.
19. To ensure that objects that are mounted on the catheterization table
(such as the tableside console) do not fall, use both hands when
attaching, removing, or moving them.
22. Do not turn OFF the power of the system inadvertently while a study is
being performed.
Normal images may not be acquired or image/patient data may be lost.
24. Before starting image acquisition, confirm that the free space on the
RAID is sufficient.
25. If study protocols registered for urgent cases are deleted, be sure to
register the substitute study protocols. If the study protocols are
changed, notify the system operators of all changed contents. If a
study for an urgent case is started while the operator is unaware of the
changed contents, the study may be adversely affected.
No. 2B308-307EN
33
CAUTION: 27. If a new study protocol with high-level-control fluoroscopy mode (HLC
mode) is created, manage the study protocol as follows.
In systems for the USA, do not select HLC mode when registering a
study protocol.
• Do not register the new study protocol at the top of the list. Be sure to
register it in the second place or lower. If it is registered at the top, the
study protocol with HLC mode may be selected unintentionally.
• Use the study protocol name so that it is possible to identify that HLC
mode is selected for the study protocol.
30. Do not place any objects in front of the power distribution board as
doing so may block access to the circuit breaker.
32. If a UPS is used in combination, confirm that the UPS is fully charged
before turning ON the power of the Alphenix system. If the UPS charge
is low, the Alphenix system may not operate properly if a power outage
occurs.
For the operating procedures for the UPS, refer to the operation
manual of the UPS.
No. 2B308-307EN
34
NOTICE: 1. Use the system within the operating environmental conditions specified in
subsection 3.2 "Environmental Requirements". In addition, observe the
storage conditions specified in item (1) "Environmental conditions for
storage" of subsection 17.2 when the system is not going to be used for a
long time. If the system is used or stored in an environment outside the
specified conditions, a system malfunction may occur.
2. Do not place any objects on the water-cooling unit. The cooling capability
may be reduced and overheating may occur, disabling system operation. If
a heavy component is placed on the top of the water-cooling unit, the system
may be damaged.
4. When the X-ray tube assembly is discharged, X-ray output may be stopped
temporarily. In this case, the images may be affected.
5. Be sure to use the X-ray tube assembly specified in this operation manual. If
an X-ray tube assembly other than that specified is used, the leakage X-rays
may increase or the optimal X-ray field may not be obtained.
8. Do not remove a CD-R or DVD±R from the system while image data from
the CD-R or DVD±R is being transferred to another recording media or the
image data from another media is being recorded on the CD-R or DVD±R. If
a CD-R or DVD±R is removed while such processing is in progress, the data
may be damaged.
10. To prevent loss of data recorded in the RAID, routinely back up the image
data for each patient on films, CD-Rs, etc. Do not continue accumulating
image data on the hard disk of the image processor. This system uses an
SSD (solid state drive) to store image data. Due to the characteristics of
SSDs, data stored in the SSD may be lost if power is not supplied for a long
time. Be sure to back up the stored data if the system will be without power
for a long time.
11. Be extremely careful not to allow the coolant circulator of the FPD to fall.
The coolant circulator has a high center of gravity and may fall easily.
No. 2B308-307EN
35
4. Description of Warning Labels
In order to use the system safely, warning labels have been attached to the
system main unit as shown below. Before using the system, check the
mounting positions and contents of the warning labels.
Label in the operation manual (example) Label on the installed product (example)
No. 2B308-307EN
36
(1) Floor-mounted C-arm support unit CAS-810A/A2
No. 2B308-307EN
37
For systems combined with the optional external cable routing kit (XGPC-
001B), the following warning label is applied to the rear of the C-arm support
unit.
No. 2B308-307EN
38
(2) Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-830B/A1
No. 2B308-307EN
39
(3) Catheterization table CAT-850B
No. 2B308-307EN
40
When the optional extension table kit (XBET-001A) is used, the following
warning label is attached to the extension table (2 locations).
No. 2B308-307EN
41
(4) Catheterization table CAT-880B
No. 2B308-307EN
42
(5) Tableside console
This label indicates that this operation manual must be referred to in order to
perform operation safely and correctly.
This label indicates that this operation manual must be referred to in order to
perform operation safely and correctly.
No. 2B308-307EN
43
(7) Wireless footswitch (option)
No. 2B308-307EN
44
(9) Switch box
No. 2B308-307EN
45
Important Information
1. To ensure safe and correct operation of the system, read the operation
manual carefully and obtain a good understanding of the system before
starting operation.
For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.
3. The warranty does not cover the following items, even during the warranty
period:
(3) Damage or loss caused by failure to meet the specified conditions for
this equipment, such as inadequate power supply, improper installation,
or unacceptable environmental conditions.
(4) Damage or loss due to mobile use in a vehicle which is not authorized
by Canon Medical Systems.
(5) Damage or loss due to use outside the territory in which the equipment
was originally sold.
(8) As a basic characteristics of the flat panel detector (FPD), the following
phenomena may occur.
However, these phenomena are not system abnormalities and are not
covered by the warranty.
• In FPDs, the output level of some pixels may differ from that of the
surrounding pixels. Therefore, some pixels may show differences in
brightness compared with the surrounding pixels.
• The sensitivity at the margins of the FPD input screen may be low
sometimes. In this case, there is a possibility of images being
adversely affected because the brightness may be low or artifacts
may occur at these margins.
• When radiography or fluoroscopy is performed for target objects with
large differences in X-ray absorption, the acquired image may be
seen on subsequent images as an after-image.
(9) The warranty of the tabletop mat does not cover the following.
No. 2B308-307EN
46
4. This equipment shall not be used by persons other than fully qualified and
certified medical personnel.
8. The purpose of this equipment is to provide doctors with data for clinical
diagnosis.
The responsibility for diagnostic procedures lies with the physicians involved.
Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for the results of diagnostic
procedures.
10. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for loss of data stored in the
memory of this equipment caused by operator error or accidents.
11. Canon Medical Systems will not be held responsible for any infections of
physicians, engineers, nurses, or patients caused by the equipment.
13. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for damage or loss that results
from negligence or from ignoring the precautions and operating instructions
contained in this operation manual.
15. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for damage resulting from use in
combination with units other than the standard components, optional units,
and standard units used in combination described in this manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
47
18. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for the following events resulting
from infection by malware (malicious software, such as a computer virus or
worm, that harms computers).
19. The following problems may occur in this product in the event of a network
failure. For details, contact your service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
48
Cybersecurity and This Product
1. Introduction
(1) Security protection for the LAN or VLAN (virtual local area network) to
which this product is connected must be in place.
(2) The network should be administered in a way that ensures that this
product can only be used by authorized persons. The network should
not normally be connected to WAN.
(3) Physical security protection (locks and entry control) should be used so
that only authorized persons may enter the area in which the product is
installed.
(5) The monitor of this product should be oriented in a way that only
authorized persons may view it.
No. 2B308-307EN
49
3. Security Measures for Use of This Product
No. 2B308-307EN
50
4. Attack Surface
The dashed lines in the following figure indicate the trust boundary of this
product. To ensure security, only trusted information (data) should be
allowed to cross the boundary. The circles on the boundary indicate the
attack surface.
No. 2B308-307EN
51
Table 1 Input source/output destination of data
This product records patients’ personal information (PI) and personal health
information (PHI). This information is unencrypted. To prevent leakage of
information or data falsification, carefully manage the data so that only an
authorized person can access it. Once the information is no longer needed,
delete the data appropriately.
No. 2B308-307EN
52
6. Network Security
NOTE: 1. When installing a physical firewall, install it between the HUB (connecting
DFP-8000C and the Angio Workstation) and the network in the facility.
2. Apply the same packet filtering rules to the firewall as for the network in the
facility to the Angio Workstation.
No. 2B308-307EN
53
6.3 Security of Wireless Communication Devices
• The internal firewall of this product handles the ports used in the DICOM
data flow defined in the system as exceptions.
Files are shared with the Angio Workstation through the file sharing system
of this product. Files can also be shared with other systems if necessary.
7. Data Security
This product can encrypt data. If data encryption is enabled, the encryption
key must be managed carefully.
The entire system disk can be encrypted to prevent the leakage of personal
information stored in the system disk. To prevent personal information
leakage due to theft, system disk encryption is recommended for products
that will be put into storage, moved to another location, or disposed of.
In system disk encryption, software-based encryption is used to prevent
startup and access to the system disk, and therefore the personal
information stored in the system is protected. The encryption of data in
system disk includes: patient data, images, log files, user environment
settings, user settings, etc.
For details about the encryption procedure, contact your CMSC service
representative. The user-defined password must be set by the system
administrator. The recovery key is produced by the system before the start
of the encryption process. The key can be used to unlock the encrypted disk
in the event of a forgotten password. The security of the system depends on
the management of the recovery key and the user-defined encryption
password. If the encryption password or recovery key is leaked (or lost),
data cannot be protected.
No. 2B308-307EN
54
(1) Encryption password and recovery key
The encryption password and recovery key should be securely
managed by the system administrator. If the recovery key is lost,
patient data saved in the system will be inaccessible. If both the
encryption password and the recovery key are lost, CMSC cannot
restore the data.
For changing the encryption password and recovery key, contact your
CMSC service representative.
7.2 Backup
Backup data saved using the backup function is stored in the specified
media in unencrypted form.
Patient information is not included in the backup data. Be sure to protect the
media on which the backup is stored to ensure the security of the data.
Once the backup data is no longer needed for recovery, render it unreadable.
If the backup data is to be stored for a long time, copying the backup data to
a USB storage media with a security function (such as a hardware-encrypted
USB drive with a keypad) is recommended.
NOTE: For restoration of the data in the event of system trouble, restoration files
can be stored in the backup disk. Encrypting the disk, or storing it in a
secured (locked) room, is recommended. For information about encryption,
refer to 7.1 "System Disk Encryption" of this section.
For further details, contact your service representative.
This product supports multiple internal and external save destinations for
X-ray images and patient information.
Temporary archive location used until the images are stored in external
archives such as the DICOM/PACS server
No. 2B308-307EN
55
7.5 Protecting the Security of Data on a Remote Archive or on the DICOM/PACS
Server
This product does not have a function to safely delete the data saved
on removable media. In accordance with the regulations and
guidelines applicable to the handling of patient information, use an
appropriate tool and procedures to delete the data saved on removable
media.
No. 2B308-307EN
56
8. Product Security
The privacy and security of this product must be set up and maintained to
ensure continued protection.
NOTE: McAfee Embedded Control keeps a record of any event in which malicious
software attacks the system and the execution of the software is prevented
by the system. Periodically checking the record logs output by McAfee
Embedded Control is recommended. An account with service engineer
privilege for this product is required to check the logs.
For how to check the logs, contact your CMSC service representative.
To access the desktop and file system of the Microsoft Windows operating
system of this product, service engineer privileges for this product are
required. For access to the operating system, contact your CMSC service
representative. Regardless of account privileges, users do not have access
to web browsers or the mail user agent.
Except for application-related files that are loaded via the application itself,
installing software and adding files cannot be performed via the Internet.
Only services required for this product are enabled. All other services are
disabled.
Screen Locking
This product features a screen locking function. The screen locking function
is disabled during examinations.
For details, refer to subsection 9.4.5 "Screen locking" of the reference
manual.
Setting the screen locking function to an appropriate time limit is
recommended to prevent data falsification by third parties, data leakage
(including patient information), etc.
No. 2B308-307EN
57
8.6 Microsoft Windows User and Password
8.7 Firewall
This function audits the system's operation. The following events are
recorded as logs:
• User management
a) Creation, change, activation, deactivation, and deletion of accounts
• Login
a) User login
b) Failed login
c) Emergency user login
d) Logout
• Start of an examination
• Image observation event in Review mode
• Image import/export (including external media)
• Image deletion
• Transfer and MPPS transfer of the modality work list
• Setting changes (change of the system setting, change of the DICOM list,
etc.)
This function determines whether the users are authorized and authenticates
authorized users. This product supports user authentication. It can be used
to check whether the user is authorized to use this product. If the user name
and password are not authenticated, the user is denied access unless there
is an emergency.
For details, refer to subsections 9.4.1 "User certification" and 9.4.2 "User
management/Authorization management" of the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
58
8.11 De-identification (DIDT) of Personal Health Information (PHI)
This function keeps system settings information and restores the system in
the event of a disaster etc. For details, contact your CMSC service
representative.
The study data saved by this product is stored on a system disk in the
RAID-1 array. The image data is stored in the image disk in the RAID-1
array. Because the data is stored on two separate hard disks, it is possible
to recover data from single-fault conditions of the disks. Only authenticated
users can access data saved in the system.
• Port blockers that require special jigs for mounting and removal are
recommended.
• USB port blocker/LAN port blocker
Lindy:
https://lindy.com/en/
https://www.lindy.com.au/usb-port-blocker-4-pack-key-pink
Panduit:
https://www.panduit.com/
Kensington:
https://www.kensington.com/
No. 2B308-307EN
59
9. Security Monitoring (Daily Checks)
It is necessary for the user to prevent unauthorized use of this product. This
product collects access records that identify users who access data. These
access records are useful for investigating unauthorized operation.
Regularly check the access records to monitor unauthorized use of the
product.
The collected access records will be overwritten when the log reaches a
certain size. It is important to proactively backup the access records to an
external storage media such as a DVD. How often the data will need to be
backed up depends on the frequency of system usage. Monitor the usage
conditions and manage access record backups carefully. For details, refer
to subsection 9.4.3 "Audit trail" of the reference manual.
Note that only matters regarding cybersecurity are supported during the
security life cycle, and that the security life cycle is independent from the
general period of support for this product.
No. 2B308-307EN
60
Radiation Protection
1. Significant zone of occupancy
600
400
400
600
500 600 Significant zone
of occupancy
(Unit: mm)
300 600
Significant zone
of occupancy
600
400
600
400
of occupancy
500 600
Significant zone
of occupancy
(Unit: mm)
No. 2B308-307EN
61
Required Actions for Power Failure
If the system power is turned OFF due to a power failure, reboot the system
by performing the standard system power ON procedures after the power is
recovered.
2. The power requirements of the system are extremely high; therefore, the
system cannot be used with a standalone power generator.
3. If the system is shut down or the power supply to the system is interrupted
due to a power failure during an examination and the system is then started
up again, the discontinued examination is resumed automatically.
No. 2B308-307EN
62
1. Intended Use
Contents 1.1 Indications for Use
1.2 Intended Use
1.3 Patient Population
1.4 User Profile
1.5 Operating Principle
1.6 Features
No. 2B308-307EN
63
1.1 Indications for Use
Alphenix INFX-8000F/B, INFX-8000F/Y, INFX-8000F/P is a digital
radiography/fluoroscopy system used in a diagnostic and interventional
angiography configuration. The system is indicated for use in diagnostic and
angiographic procedures for blood vessels in the heart, brain, abdomen and
lower extremities.
• SP cardiac system This system is designed for selective cardiac angiography (with
catheterization).
• DP cardiac system
This system is intended for use in interventional procedures for cardiac
(*1)
vessels, such as PCI, and also for use in EP (electrophysiological) studies.
• SP vascular system This system is designed for selective angiography (with catheterization) of
the head, abdomen, and lower extremities.
• DP vascular system
This system is intended for use in interventional procedures, such as
(*1)
embolization, for blood vessels in the head, abdomen, and lower
extremities.
*1) The DP (dual-plane) system is composed of both the DP cardiac system and
the DP vascular system. Switch to the cardiac system or the vascular
system according to the type of examination.
NOTICE: Federal law restricts this device to sale, distribution, and use by or on the
order of a physician.
The INFX-8000F/B system is limited by law to investigational use for
indications not specified in this section.
This caution is only for the U.S.A.
No. 2B308-307EN
64
1.3 Patient Population
Intended patients : Not specified
No. 2B308-307EN
65
1.6 Features
(1) A tube support that allows positioning for radiography to be performed by
simple operation is used in combination. The auto positioning and auto
angle functions, which are described in (2) below, are provided for the tube
support, making possible to automatically reproduce the radiographic
position.
(2) The auto positioning function for automatically reproducing the preset
radiographic position, the auto angle function for automatically reproducing
the radiographic position used for image acquisition, and the auto map
function for automatically retrieving images acquired at an angle close to the
current radiographic position are provided.
(3) Various functions such as pulsed fluoroscopy, various dose settings, pulse
rate setting, beam hardening filters, and virtual collimation, virtual filtering,
and virtual position using an LIH image are provided. The exposure dose
can be reduced by using such functions in combination.
(4) The acquired images can be analyzed, output to films, and stored in a media
(background processing) during examination. These processes can be
performed simultaneously, significantly reducing the time required for
examination.
(5) DICOM Print, Storage, Storage Commitment, Q&R, MWM, and MPPS can
be used.
(6) Various types of image processing, DPRF (dynamic pattern recognition filter),
ADCF (advanced digital compensation filter), and SNRF (super noise
reduction filter) are provided, reducing persistence and noise in images.
(7) Various safety functions, data storage to RAID, reduced operation mode in
the case of system failure, and interlocks and touch sensors for preventing
accidents are provided.
No. 2B308-307EN
66
2. Composition
Contents 2.1 Outline
2.2 System Components
2.3 Optional Units
2.4 Compatible Units
No. 2B308-307EN
67
2.1 Outline
Alphenix INFX-8000F/B, INFX-8000F/Y, INFX-8000F/P systems consist of
standard and optional units. The system configuration differs according to
the diagnostic purpose. The figures below show a configuration example.
Control room
Main console
System console
No. 2B308-307EN
68
(2) Examination room
(a) SP cardiac/SP vascular/DP cardiac system
No. 2B308-307EN
69
2.2 System Components
(1) System components
The table below lists the system components for each system model.
indicates that the unit is provided as the standard, while indicates that a
choice of units is available.
Note that the units that can be used in combination differ depending on a
variety of conditions. For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
70
SP cardiac SP vascular DP system
Unit Model name (*1)
system system (*6)
Footswitch XBFS-850S
XBFS-880S
Digital radiography system DFP-8000C/A2
Keyboard kit XIDF-KBD802/EN
TV monitor ML191913 or
• for examination room equivalent
• for control room CL19196 or
• for backup of the large-screen monitor equivalent
System monitor CDL2013A-1A or
equivalent
Main console C (*5) XIDF-MCC80S
Power ON switch box XIDF-PON801
Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room XIDF-FS801S
X-ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100XG
Monitor suspension IDI1000F-2WCA
IDI1000F-3WCA
IDI1000F-4WCA
IDI1000F-6WCA
MSF-04A
MSF-06A
Ceiling rail for monitor suspension XGMR-011A
DP system kit For DVI connection XIDF-DPS801/C1
*1) The auxiliary model number (/**) appended to the model name of some
units is omitted in the text of the operation and reference manuals.
*2) Air-cooled FPD
*3) Water-cooled FPD
*4) Can be used in combination with the DP 0° layout system. Cannot be
used in combination with the DP 90° layout system.
*5) Referred to as the "main console" in the operation and reference
manuals.
*6) For some units, two units are used in combination.
*7) Intended for X-ray flat panel detector TFP-1216A/C1.
No. 2B308-307EN
71
(2) Main unit components
The table below shows the components constituting the main unit.
No. 2B308-307EN
72
2.3 Optional Units
The optional units are listed in the table below.
SP cardiac SP vascular DP
Optional unit Model name
system system system
Satellite console XGCP-880AA
XGCP-880AA/B1
Tableside console XGCP-880BA/TA
(for use in combination with a tablet console) (*1)
Satellite console XGCP-880AA/TA
(for use in combination with a tablet console) (*2)
Base plate (for the CAS-810A) XGBP-810A
Tabletop control switch XBFG-001A
Tabletop control console XBFG-850B
Footswitch (additional) (*3) XBFS-850S
XBFS-880S
Wireless footswitch (*4) (*5) XBFS-880WS
Wireless footswitch kit (*5) XBFM-850A
(For CAT-850B)
Wireless footswitch kit (*5) XBFM-880A
(For CAT-880B)
Armrest (for both arms) XBAR110A
Handgrip (for the CAT-850B) XBHG-001A
Handgrip (for the CAT-880B) XBHG-002A
Arm cover XBAC-001A
Accessory tabletop rail (for the CAT-880B) XBAM-001A
Drape holder (for the CAT-880B) XBDB-001A
Base plate (for the CAT-850B/CAT-880B) XBBP250B
Extension rails XBER-001A
Extension table XBET-001A
Head-end table control switch kit XBHR-001A
Tabletop mat XBTM-001A
(low-rebound, thickness = 5 cm)
System cabinet CAB-100B
Side cover CABS-100B
Corner cover CABC-100B
TV monitor (for control room or examination ML19193 or
room) CL19196
• for examination room
• for control room
• for backup of the large-screen monitor
No. 2B308-307EN
73
SP cardiac SP vascular DP
Optional unit Model name
system system system
Kit for adding the reference monitor XIDF-REF801/C1
Stepping DSA support kit (for the CAT-850B) XBSD-850B
Stepping DSA kit XIDF-STP801
Rotational DSA kit XIDF-ROT801
Low-contrast imaging kit XIDF-LCI801
3D-Angio kit XIDF-3DI801
3D roadmap kit XIDF-3DP802/C1
Spot fluoroscopy kit XIDF-SFL801
Security kit for DoD XIDF-SEC802
Scan converter DSC-X001A
Microphone kit XIDF-MIC802
Ext. signal display kit XIDF-ESD801
XIDF-ESD801/A1
Ext. signal display monitor (Color LCD monitor) CDL2013A-1A or
equivalent
Area dose meter ion chamber XJDC-009A
XJDC-016A
Area dose meter XJDK-002A/V8
Review console XIDF-RVC801
Large-screen monitor (for digital output, 48 ports) XMEZ-LMM021/
A2
Large-screen monitor (for digital output, 16 ports) XMEZ-LMM021/
A3
Digital encoder 1 XMEZ-LMMENC/
(for adding a DVI input channels) (*6) D1
Digital encoder 2 XMEZ-LMMENC/
(for adding two DVI input channels) (*6) D2
Additional panel PC (*6) XMEZ-PNLPC
Stand for additional panel PC (*6) XMEZ-LMMSTD
Large monitor accessory kit 2 XIDF-LMA802/C1
(for digital output) (*7)
Large monitor accessory kit 2 XIDF-LMA802/CS
(for digital output, with stand) (*7)
Monitor suspension for flat panel MSF-56A
(for Large monitor)
Lateral rails for flat panel monitor suspension XGMR-MSF021
Monitor Integration system XMEZ-LMMCR1
Integrated monitor accessory kit XIDF-INA801
AD converter kit XMEZ-PDC001
No. 2B308-307EN
74
SP cardiac SP vascular DP
Optional unit Model name
system system system
Ceiling height adjustment kit XGHA-001A
External cable routing kit XGPC-001B (*8)
DP system kit XGDU-800B
XGDU-809B
Magnetic shielding kit XGPA-800A
XGPA-1200A
XGPA-1216A
Longitudinal sensor unit (for CAT-850B) XBLS-850B
Basic kit for clinical analysis application XIDF-QCA850/A1
QCA kit XIDF-QCA851/A1
QVA kit XIDF-QCA852/A1
LVA kit XIDF-QCA853/A1
RVA kit XIDF-QCA855/A1
3D QCA kit XIDF-QCA856/A1
Stent enhancer kit XIDF-QCA857
Tableside tablet console XACP-001BA/C1
Satellite tablet console XACP-001AA/C1
Tableside tablet console (with switch box) XACP-002BA/C1
Satellite tablet console (with switch box) XACP-002AA/C1
No. 2B308-307EN
75
2.4 Compatible Units
(1) Injector
(a) MARK-VII ARTERION
(b) AVANTA
(c) AVIDIA
(e) CVi
(f) Rempress
(g) ACCUTRON HP
(2) 3D Workstation
• Vitrea
No. 2B308-307EN
76
(5) Network devices
The combined equipment should meet the requirements below.
For connection of the following units, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.
NOTE: For details of combinable devices, refer to the accompanying documents for
the relevant system.
No. 2B308-307EN
77
No. 2B308-307EN
78
3. Operating Requirements
Contents 3.1 Power Requirements
3.2 Environmental Requirements
3.3 Installation Conditions
3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements
3.5 Energy Conservation Measures
No. 2B308-307EN
79
3.1 Power Requirements
The power cables of units are routed at the time of system installation and
the user does not have to connect these cables.
*1) When a step-up transformer (XSDT-100C) is used, the power can also
be supplied from 3-phase AC mains with a rating of 200 V.
*2) Value obtained by adding the power voltage variation due to system
load to the power voltage variation under no load.
No. 2B308-307EN
80
3.2 Environmental Requirements
This system must be used under the following environmental conditions.
NOTICE: Do not use the system in an environment where abrupt temperature changes
can occur. Abrupt temperature changes can produce condensation within
the system, which may cause corrosion or a malfunction in the system.
No. 2B308-307EN
81
3.3 Installation Conditions
The installation conditions for this system are specified below. For the
installation procedures, refer to the installation manual for the system.
DP system
SP system
0° layout 90° layout (*2)
Room Width 5400 mm or more 5400 mm or more 6900 mm or more
dimensions
Depth 7300 mm or more 7300 mm or more 6400 mm or more
Ceiling height 2800 mm or more ≥ 2800 mm; ≤ 3000 mm
X-ray protection work The walls, ceiling, and floor of the examination room, the window glass for
observation from the control room, and entrance doors must be provided with
X-ray shielding in accordance with the local and national regulations of the area
where this system is installed.
Potential equalization The room in which this system is installed must be provided with protective and
equipotential grounding in accordance with all applicable local legal requirements,
and the room must be used for medical purposes only.
Grounding requirements Grounding must be provided in accordance with all applicable local legal
requirements for medically-used electrical equipment.
*1) For details of the installation conditions, refer to the installation manual
for the system.
*2) For systems combined with catheterization table CAT-850B
Location Environment
C-arm support unit Examination room Patient environment
Catheterization table Patient environment
X-ray tube assembly Patient environment
X-ray beam limiting device Patient environment
FPD Patient environment
Monitor suspension unit Within or outside the patient
TV monitor environment
No. 2B308-307EN
82
3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements
Item Classification/Safety
Type of protection against Class I (permanently installed equipment)
electric shock (*1)
Degree of protection against Type B applied part (catheterization table)
electric shock (*1)
Degree of protection against Whole system: IP00
harmful ingress of water or Footswitch: IP28
particulate matter (*2)
Mode of operation (*1) Continuous operation
Degree of safety of Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a
application in the presence flammable anaesthetic mixture with air or with
of a flammable anaesthetic oxygen or nitrous oxide
mixture with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide (*1)
Mechanical safety Catheterization table
Maximum permissible load/maximum patient
weight/maximum weight of accessories and options
• CAT-850B: 240 kg/220 kg/20 kg
• CAT-880B: 270 kg/250 kg/20 kg
Applied part Tabletop of the catheterization table
No. 2B308-307EN
83
3.5 Energy Conservation Measures
The following steps can help conserve energy.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the system when the system is not
going to be used.
(2) Turn OFF the power of the monitor even during brief
periods away from the system.
NOTE: 1. To reduce the power consumption of the system, the system automatically
enters sleep mode in the following cases. Note that sleep mode operates
differently depending on the situation.
• If the system is not used for 15 minutes after the end of a study, monitors
other than the system monitor and the large-screen monitor enter sleep
mode.
• If the system is not used for 15 minutes after the end of a study and the
support unit is in the park position, tube filament preheating of the X-ray tube
assembly is terminated.
• If both of the following two conditions are applicable, anode rotation in the
X-ray tube assembly is terminated.
a) The system has not been used for 15 minutes after the end of a study and
the support unit is in the park position.
b) Two hours has elapsed since system startup and the HU for the X-ray tube
assembly is 15% or less.
2. When study start operation is performed, the system exits sleep mode.
If the system does not exit sleep mode for some reason, hold down the [Ctrl],
[Alt], and [Delete] keys simultaneously to forcibly exit sleep mode.
Note that it is possible to adjust the period of time before the system enters
sleep mode.
For details, contact your service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
84
4. Names and Functions of the Parts of
the System
Contents 4.1 System Console (System Monitor)
4.2 Main Console
4.3 Tableside Console
4.4 Satellite Console (Option)
4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor
4.6 Reference Monitor
4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit
4.8 Catheterization Table
4.9 Tabletop Control Console (Option)
No. 2B308-307EN
85
4.1 System Console (System Monitor)
The system console is used to perform study-related operations such as
registration and retrieval of study information, support of various studies, file
manipulation, and image processing.
No. 2B308-307EN
86
4.1.1 Common information display area
The following information items are displayed in the common information
display area.
This icon blinks until the system is ready for X-ray generation after
starting up the system.
It lights when X-ray generation is ready.
This icon is displayed when the first stage of the handswitch is pressed
and X-ray exposure is ready.
This icon is displayed when the patient incident dose rate reaches the
limit.
No. 2B308-307EN
87
FPD field size (FOV) display
No. 2B308-307EN
88
NOTE: Select a method from the following cumulative dose/dose rate calculation
methods.
For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
89
4.1.2 Status bar
NOTE: The error logs can also be stored in InnerVision in the case of system reset
processing. Use this function when Snap shot cannot be executed due to an
error such as system failure. For details, refer to subsection 5.8 "System
Reset".
The status icons indicating the status of the following processing are
displayed.
NOTE: When the status icon is clicked, a dialog box is displayed and details of the
processing status can be checked. For details, refer to section 5 "Image File
Management" of the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
90
Local Network Printing
Status System local processing Network processing Printing processing
3D
Status
3D processing
Memory acquisition error
An unsupported command is received or another internal error has occurred.
An error has occurred when a request is issued to the Angio Workstation. (An
error has occurred during image transfer.)
An error has occurred when a request is issued to the Angio Workstation.
(Response waiting timeout)
The Angio Workstation has issued an error while reconstruction/calibration
termination processing is in progress.
No. 2B308-307EN
91
[3] [System disk]
[4] [RAID]
The free space in the image memory is displayed. The display may differ
depending on whether the study is or is not in progress. Note that this
display does not show an accurate value for the free space. It should be
used only as a rough guide.
(a) Study in progress: The free space is displayed as the number of frames.
NOTE: When the RAID becomes full, delete or move files from the RAID to secure
the required free space. For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
92
4.1.3 Mode area
This area is used for setting and selection for each mode. Click the tab
showing the desired mode name to display the setting screen for the mode.
[Patient] mode
[Acquisition] mode
The fluoroscopic conditions and the radiographic conditions are set for the
current study in this mode.
Image files recorded in the RAID are transferred to a CD-R or DICOM server
in this mode. For details, refer to the reference manual.
[Printing] mode
The acquired images are printed in this mode. The images to be printed are
generated on the display and transferred to the printer. For details, refer to
the reference manual.
Various system functions and conditions are preset in this mode. See the
reference manual.
[Shutdown] mode
No. 2B308-307EN
93
4.1.4 Basic operating procedures using the system console (System monitor)
This subsection describes the basic operating procedures using the system
console, such as the procedure for the selection of functions using the
corresponding buttons.
NOTE: The cursor is moved from the current monitor to the next monitor in a preset
order (refer to the example below). To change the order, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
To select a function, move the cursor to the desired button and press the left
or right mouse button (left-click or right-click the desired function button).
No. 2B308-307EN
94
(2) Procedures for selecting functions and settings
(2.1) Control button
Select an item from among the functions/conditions displayed in the list box
as follows.
<1> Move the cursor to in the list box and click it.
<2> Move the cursor to the item to be selected and click it.
Move the cursor to the target radio button and click it. A mark is placed in
the button and the corresponding function is selected.
Move the cursor to the target check box and click it. A check mark is placed
in the box and the corresponding function is selected. If the selected check
box is clicked again, it is deselected.
No. 2B308-307EN
95
(2.5) Scroll bar
(2.6) Slider
Used to increase/decrease the value. Move the cursor to the slider and click
it. While holding down the mouse button, move the slider to the left or right.
When the slider is moved to the right, the value increases. When the slider
is moved to the left, the value decreases.
No. 2B308-307EN
96
(3) Entering the text
The procedure for entering the patient name and other information is
described below.
<1> Move the cursor to the text entry section. The shape of the cursor changes
to .
<4> To set the entered text, press the Enter key on the keyboard.
NOTE: 1. The entered text can be deleted using the Backspace key or Delete key on
the keyboard.
2. It is possible to move to the next text entry section using the Tab key (or in
some cases the Enter key) on the keyboard.
3. Pressing the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard displays the current position of the
mouse pointer.
No. 2B308-307EN
97
(4) Adjusting the display area
In the screen for [Directory] mode, the size of display area of the [Patient],
[Study], and [Image] windows can be changed.
<1> Move the cursor to the border and click it. The shape of the cursor is
changes to .
<1> Move the cursor to the target data and click it.
<2> While holding down the mouse button, move the cursor to the movement
destination (drag).
<2> Drag
No. 2B308-307EN
98
4.2 Main Console
The main console is used to support operations in the examination room
from the control room. This console is used in combination with the
fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room. It is also possible to use it in
combination with the optional review console.
No. 2B308-307EN
99
(1.2) Basic image operating section
NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu operating
lever. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") From the Examination Room". Only in an emergency, start a
study using the menu operating lever.
CAUTION: Except when an emergency study is required, do not press the top of
the menu operating lever without starting a study ("Start Study"). The
system enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.
No. 2B308-307EN
100
(2) Power ON switch box
The power ON switch box is used to turn ON/OFF the power of the system.
It is installed next to the monitor in the control room.
WARNING: If the power of the system is turned OFF using the Power OFF button,
the results of any image processing that is in progress are not saved.
Be sure to turn OFF the power from the system console in all cases
other than emergencies.
No. 2B308-307EN
101
(3) Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room
The fluoroscopy footswitch is used to start/stop fluoroscopy. It is installed in
the control room.
No. 2B308-307EN
102
(4) Review console (option)
This console is used for image playback and image processing.
CAUTION: The brightness adjustment dial and contrast adjustment dial should be
rotated slowly. If the dial is rotated too quickly, halation may occur and
the image may disappear. In this case, rotate the dial in the opposite
direction until the image becomes visible again.
If the fluoroscopic image does not return to normal, reset the
brightness/contrast settings (refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions
Using Function Buttons" of the reference manual).
No. 2B308-307EN
103
4.3 Tableside Console
The tableside console is used by the physician to operate the support unit or
catheterization table in the examination room or to perform image viewing
operations such as reference image playback.
NOTE: 1. If the optional tablet console (with switch box) is used in combination, it is
also possible to use the tableside console shown below. Note that this
console is not provided with the image operating section. Some functions
available in the image operating section can be executed using the switch
box.
2. When the tableside console is removed from the rail of the catheterization
table, the rail switch on the rear of the tableside console is turned OFF.
The tableside console cannot be used to operate the support unit or
catheterization table while the rail switch is OFF.
No. 2B308-307EN
104
(1) Positioning operating section
This operating section is used to set the radiographic position.
No. 2B308-307EN
105
(2) Image field operating section
This is the operating section for changing the X-ray exposure field and the
FOV, adjusting the position of the compensation filter, and rotating the FPD.
*1) For the DP system, this lever can also be used for manual rotation
operation of the FPD by switching to the DP vascular system (CAS-
830B used). The FPD is rotated in the same direction as the lever is
rotated, and the FPD returns to the initial angle when the lever is
pressed. The FPD moves to the set position (portrait or landscape)
when the lever is held down for 1 second or longer.
No. 2B308-307EN
106
(3) Image operating section
This image operating section is used to play back and switch acquired
images.
NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu operating
lever. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") From the Examination Room". Only in an emergency, start a
study using the menu operating lever.
CAUTION: Except when an emergency study is required, do not press the top of
the menu operating lever without starting a study ("Start Study"). The
system enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.
START
[23] Auto-positioning start button
No. 2B308-307EN
107
Status of auto-positioning selection button Description of function button
Auto (The light is not lit.) The function assigned to each button can be selected.
Pos.
The function button is lit.
Functions have been assigned to each function button at
the time of system installation. To change these
assignments, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.
The auto-positioning No. can be entered.
Auto
Pos. (The light is lit.) The function button is not lit.
No. 2B308-307EN
108
4.4 Satellite Console (Option)
The satellite console is used to support operation from the tableside console.
It can be installed on a dedicated stand and be placed away from the
catheterization table.
Register the satellite console installation position in the system and perform
operation from the registered position. For the satellite console installation
procedure, refer to subsection 6.2 "Installing the Satellite Console (Option)".
In general, the operating procedures for the buttons etc. on the satellite
console are the same as those for the buttons etc. on the tableside console.
However, the operating procedures of some of the operating sections differ.
The satellite console (option) and the tablet console (option) can be mounted
on a dedicated stand.
NOTE: 1. When the satellite console is removed from the rail of the stand, the rail
switch on the rear of the satellite console is turned OFF. The satellite
console cannot be used to operate the support unit or catheterization table
while the rail switch is OFF.
2. For the function buttons on the satellite console, the functions that differ from
those on the tableside console can be set. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
109
NOTE: If the optional tablet console (with switch box) is used in combination, it is
also possible to use the satellite console shown below. Note that this
console is not provided with the image operating section. Some functions
available in the image operating section can be executed using the switch
box.
No. 2B308-307EN
110
[1] C-arm operating lever
[C-arm rotation/sliding]
Tilt the lever in the C-arm rotation or sliding direction while holding
down the top button of the lever. As the lever tilt angle increases, the
movement speed increases.
If the support column rotation angle is not 0°, the lever tilt direction and
the C-arm operating direction may not match. To ensure that these
directions match, select the anatomical angle control function using the
Anatomical angle control selection button [2].
Tilt the lever in the longitudinal direction or in the lateral direction while
holding down the button next to the lever.
When the lever is returned to the center, C-arm support unit movement
stops.
Holding down the lever and tilting it away from you moves the tabletop
upward.
Holding down the lever and tilting it toward you moves the tabletop
downward.
No. 2B308-307EN
111
[8] 0 button
CAUTION: The table up/down movement/support column rotation lever ([5]), and
the FPD near/away movement lever ([6]) are single-action levers that
permit the system to be controlled by simply tilting the lever.
Therefore, take special care to prevent inadvertent operation.
Unintended system movement may injure the patient.
Note that a lever may be tilted inadvertently by a part of the operator's
body when the operator is positioning the patient, attaching the sterile
cover, etc.
No. 2B308-307EN
112
4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor
This monitor is used to display fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images, LIH images, radiographic images, and dynamic images. The
display information differs depending on the system and the unit used in
combination.
NOTE: It is possible to set the system so that dynamic images are displayed on the
reference monitor.
For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.
Fluoroscopic monitor
No. 2B308-307EN
113
[1] Image display area
Images are displayed in this area together with the following image-
related information (except in the case of LIH images). Note that the
only related information items displayed during fluoroscopy are the
brightness, contrast, spatial filter, and image magnification ratio. The
only related information item displayed during radiography is the
elapsed radiographic time.
No. 2B308-307EN
114
[3] Patient information
After the study starts, the patient name, date of birth, sex, and age are
displayed. The age is displayed as follows.
• 25-year-old patient : 25 Y
• 3-month-old patient : 3M
• 2-week-old patient : 2W
• 5-day-old patient : 5D
SID display
No. 2B308-307EN
115
[6] X-ray information display
NOTE: It is possible to also display the elapsed time for radiography. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
116
[8] Status indictors
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Rotational DSA enabled status LIH image (mask image) is
being displayed.
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when "Peak" is
Display when "CO2" is selected
selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when "fluoroscopic
Display when "Add" is selected
subtraction" is selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping Display when fluoroscopic
Display when "fluoroscopic acquisition is performed in
landmark" is selected normal mode
Display when fluoroscopic Display when fluoroscopic
acquisition is performed in HLC acquisition is performed in
mode HLC-L mode
No. 2B308-307EN
117
X-ray exposure disabled status
Error and warning information for the system is displayed here. The
display styles for these information items differ as shown below.
Lights when the image displayed in the image display area is selected
as the target for image processing.
No. 2B308-307EN
118
4.6 Reference Monitor
This monitor is used to display map images. Depending on the system, it
may also be possible to display RUN images (dynamic playback images).
Reference monitor
No. 2B308-307EN
119
Menu name display
The name of the menu selected in the menu display area is displayed
here.
Up to 10 menus can be set for every study protocol. It is possible to
display one menu at one time and to switch to the next menu to be
displayed.
For the menu switching method and the function switching method in
the menu display area, refer to subsection 12.3 "Switching Between
Menus on the Reference Monitor and Selecting Functions".
Menu display area
The function buttons registered in the menus are displayed here.
Up to 8 function buttons can be registered in each menu.
[Warning display]
The error and warning information items for the system are displayed
here. The display styles for these information items differ as shown
below.
Lights when the image displayed in the image display area is selected
as the target for image processing.
NOTE: A Favorites function for displaying frequently used menus is available when
an appropriate setting is made. To change the setting, contact your service
representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
120
4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit
CAUTION: To maintain the performance of the FPD touch sensor, observe the
following precautions.
• Do not allow sharp objects to come in contact with the touch sensors.
If the cover or interior of the touch sensor is damaged, the
performance of the touch sensor will deteriorate.
• To maintain the safety of the system, replace the touch sensors every
3 years. To replace the touch sensors, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
CAS-810A/A2
No. 2B308-307EN
121
[1] FPD
[4] C-arm
No. 2B308-307EN
122
(2) Movement of each section
No. 2B308-307EN
123
4.7.2 Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit
This unit is used to set the position and angle of the X-ray exposure field.
CAS-830A/A1
[1] FPD
[4] C-arm
No. 2B308-307EN
124
(2) Support column operation buttons
These are the local control buttons for operating the C-arm support unit.
Each operates the C-arm support unit only while it is held down. When it is
released, C-arm support unit movement stops.
CAUTION: When the C-arm support unit is operated using these buttons,
movement cannot be observed properly because the support column
obstructs the view. Take special care to prevent interference between
the C-arm support unit and persons or surrounding units.
[1] [4]
[2] [5]
[3] [6]
Moves the C-arm support unit toward the left of the patient.
No. 2B308-307EN
125
[4] Longitudinal movement button
Moves the C-arm support unit toward the right of the patient.
No. 2B308-307EN
126
(3) Movement of the support unit
No. 2B308-307EN
127
4.8 Catheterization Table
The patient is set on this table. For the operating procedures, refer to
section 9 "Operating Procedures for Units in the Examination Room".
*1) The permissible load and the permissible patient weight differ
depending on the catheterization table.
*2) Total weight of the accessories and options assumed to be set on the
catheterization table
*3) When the accessory tabletop rail (option) with heavy components
installed on it is used in combination, the maximum permissible patient
weight on the catheterization table is 220 kg.
No. 2B308-307EN
128
WARNING: 2. Do not mount an object weighing more than 40 kg on the accessory
mounting rails of the catheterization table. In addition, do not mount
the optional accessory tabletop rail for an accessory that can be
attached at the head end of the tabletop (*1). Doing so may damage the
rails and cause an accident.
Note that the above values are the maximum limits when the center of
gravity of the object is immediately above the rails ("A" in the following
figure). The maximum limits become lower if the center of gravity of
the object is further from the rails. For example, if the center of gravity
of the object is a lateral distance of 100 mm away from the rails ("B" in
the following figure), the maximum permissible mass of the mounted
object becomes less than half of the maximum limit. For details, refer
to the table below.
3. Do not subject the head end of the tabletop of the catheterization table
to excessive force. The tabletop may be damaged and the patient may
be injured. Observe the following precautions.
• Before the patient gets on/off the catheterization table, move the
tabletop to the foot-end limit.
Have the patient get on/off the catheterization table from the center of
the table. Have an assistant help if required. Ensure that the patient
does not get on/off at the tabletop-end section. In particular, ensure
that the patient does not sit on the tabletop end-section.
• Before performing cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), move the
tabletop to the patient foot-end limit (stroke end).
• Do not place objects under the tabletop because they may interfere
with the tabletop when the tabletop is lowered.
No. 2B308-307EN
129
WARNING: 5. During tabletop tilting, there may be insufficient clearance between the
tabletop and the floor or between the console or related units installed
on the catheterization table and the floor. Be extremely careful to avoid
catching your feet.
In particular, when the tablet console used in combination with the
system is installed near the foot end of the catheterization table and
the catheterization table is tilted toward the foot end, there may be
insufficient clearance between the floor and the tablet console. Keep
this point in mind.
CAUTION: During tabletop rotation, the tabletop and the entire column support
section move. Be careful not to get your foot caught between the
support column cover and the floor.
No. 2B308-307EN
130
4.8.1 Catheterization table (CAT-850B)
[2] Tabletop
[4] Footswitch
No. 2B308-307EN
131
(2) Operating panel
This panel includes the operating buttons for the catheterization table and
displays the operating status.
Operating panel
Releases the tabletop rotation brake and lights when the brake is
released.
When the button is pressed again to reapply the brake, the light goes
out.
Note that the brake is automatically reapplied and the tabletop is
secured 10 seconds after the tabletop rotation brake is released.
Locks the tabletop lateral movement brake and lights when the brake is
engaged.
When the button is pressed again, the brake is released and the light
goes out.
Though the tabletop can normally be moved in both the longitudinal and
lateral directions, the tabletop lateral movement lock restricts tabletop
movement to the longitudinal direction.
Used to check the set step-sliding movement and adjust the step-sliding
distance.
When the button indicating the tabletop sliding direction is pressed,
step-sliding is performed (1 step each time the button is pressed).
No. 2B308-307EN
132
[5] Power reset button
Used to turn ON the drive power of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table after it has been turned OFF using the Emergency
stop button. Wait for at least 5 seconds after pressing the Emergency
stop button before pressing this button.
No. 2B308-307EN
133
(3) Footswitch (wired footswitch)
Details of the wired footswitch are described below. For the wireless
footswitch, refer to (4) "Wireless footswitch" in subsection 4.8.1.
CAUTION: To prevent interference between the footswitch and the support unit,
operate the support unit only after confirming that the footswitch is not
positioned within the operating range of the support unit. Also, take
special care to prevent interference between the footswitch and the
support unit while operating the support unit. If the footswitch is
pressed by the support unit, X-rays may be generated unintentionally.
No. 2B308-307EN
134
(3.2) Footswitch with function buttons
The settings in parentheses are the default functions assigned at the time of
shipment. For the functions that can be assigned, contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative.
Function button 2
(HLC fluoroscopy start button)
NOTE: If the HLC fluoroscopy start button and F-REC start button are assigned to
function buttons, when they are pressed simultaneously, the F-REC start
button is selected and fluoroscopic image recording starts.
No. 2B308-307EN
135
(4) Wireless footswitch
The details of the wireless footswitch are described below. For the wired
footswitch, refer to (3) "Footswitch (wired footswitch)" of subsection 4.8.1.
CAUTION: 1. Before operating the support unit, confirm that the footswitch is not
placed within the movement range of the support unit. In addition, be
extremely careful to prevent the footswitch from being caught during
operation of the support unit. If the footswitch is caught by the
support unit, an exposure switch may be pressed and unintentional
X-ray exposure may result.
NOTE: 1. The receiver of the wireless footswitch is located on the patient right-hand
side to ensure good signal reception. If it is necessary to use the wireless
footswitch on the patient left-hand side, place the wireless footswitch as
close to the catheterization table as possible.
2. Signal-blocking objects such as the support unit, peripheral units, or persons
should not be located between the support column section of the
catheterization table and the wireless footswitch.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, place the wireless footswitch as close
to the catheterization table as possible.
3. Depending on the wireless network environment, network interference may
occur, possibly resulting in interruption of communication. When the
wireless footswitch is used, avoid using other wireless devices whenever
possible.
4. Confirm that the green LED lights before using the footswitch. If the LED
blinks, communication with the receptor is not established. In this case,
move the footswitch toward the receptor until the LED lights.
5. The orange LED indicates that the remaining charge of the battery is low and
the communication range may therefore be limited to 5 m or less. In this
case, charge the battery referring to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the
battery".
The footswitch can be used while the battery is being charged. For details,
refer to subsection (4.6) "Emergency battery charging".
No. 2B308-307EN
136
(4.2) Name and function of each section
The name and function of each section of the wireless footswitch are
described.
NOTE: If the HLC fluoroscopy start button and F-REC start button are assigned to
the function buttons of the footswitch and both buttons are pressed at the
same time, the F-REC start button is selected and fluoroscopic image
recording starts.
No. 2B308-307EN
137
(4.3) LED display
The status of the wireless footswitch can be checked by the lighting status of
the LEDs.
NOTE: 1. If the battery is completely discharged (all the LEDs go OFF or both the
green and orange LEDs go OFF), fully charge the battery before using the
wireless footswitch.
2. If the battery cannot be charged, or if, even after a full charge, the battery
runs out immediately or the wireless footswitch cannot be used, failure of the
wireless footswitch or abnormality in the battery is likely. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative for inspection.
3. If the red LED lights, restart the system. If the LED does not go OFF after
restarting the system, failure of the wireless footswitch is likely. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative for inspection.
4. If the red LED blinks, restart the system, or connect the footswitch to the AC
adaptor and plug it into an outlet. If the LED continues to blink, failure of the
wireless footswitch is likely. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative for inspection.
No. 2B308-307EN
138
(4.4) Operating procedure
<1> Confirm that with the system turned ON, the orange LED goes OFF and the
green LED lights.
The procedure for operating the buttons on the wireless footswitch is the
same as that for the wired footswitch. For details, refer to (3) "Footswitch
(wired footswitch)" in subsection 4.8.1.
NOTICE: After the power of the system is turned ON, wait until the green LED of the
wireless footswitch lights. If the button or pedal of the wireless footswitch is
pressed before the green LED lights, the system detects an error (the red
LED blinks) and operation from the wireless footswitch is disabled. For the
procedure for clearing the error, refer to (4.3) "LED display".
NOTE: 1. When the orange LED lights, battery charging is required. For the charging
procedure, refer to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the battery" and (4.6)
"Emergency battery charging".
2. If communication is interrupted and the green LED blinks when the pedal is
being pressed, release the pedal and then press it again. If communication
is not recovered, it is likely that the communication environment is
insufficient. Change the footswitch position and press the pedal again. The
green LED lights if communication is recovered.
No. 2B308-307EN
139
(4.5) Procedure for charging the battery
When the remaining charge in the battery is low, charge the battery using
the AC adaptor supplied with the footswitch.
For the procedure for charging the battery during use of the footswitch, refer
to (4.6) "Emergency battery charging".
<1> Connect the connector of the AC adaptor to the connector of the wireless
footswitch for charging.
<2> Connect the AC adaptor to the power outlet of the facility. Charging starts
and the orange LED blinks. The battery will reach a full charge in about 4.5
hours (if it was fully discharged). The orange LED goes OFF when charging
is completed.
<3> Disconnect the connector of the AC adaptor from the connector of the
wireless footswitch and securely tighten the connector cap.
NOTICE: 1. During charging of the battery (when the AC adaptor is connected), do not
use the wireless footswitch for examinations. An accident may occur.
2. After the battery is fully charged, securely tighten the connector cap in the
footswitch. Failure to do so may permit entry of water, etc., resulting in
malfunction of the footswitch.
NOTE: The battery can be recharged approximately 500 times. Replace it once a
year or when a decrease in usable time between charges becomes
noticeable. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative
when battery replacement is required.
No. 2B308-307EN
140
(4.6) Emergency battery charging
If the remaining charge in the battery becomes low during the examination
(the orange LED lights), use the supplied emergency power supply cable to
supply power from the catheterization table. Power is supplied to the
wireless footswitch, and charging of the battery starts at the same time.
Operation from the wireless footswitch can be continued. If the battery is not
recharged and the battery runs out, operation from the wireless footswitch
becomes impossible.
<1> Connect the emergency power supply cable connector to the connector of
the wireless footswitch for charging.
<2> Connect the connector on the other end of the emergency power supply
cable to the footswitch connector of the catheterization table. For the
location of the footswitch connector, refer to subsection 6.4 "Connecting the
Cables". Charging starts and the orange LED blinks.
<3> After the examination is terminated, charge the battery of the wireless
footswitch using the AC adaptor. Refer to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the
battery".
NOTICE: 1. Keep the emergency power supply cable in an easily accessible location. It
is recommended that the location of the emergency power supply cable be
confirmed when daily checks are performed.
No. 2B308-307EN
141
NOTE: 1. In systems with the wired footswitch used in combination, the connectors for
the wired footswitch and wireless footswitch are provided in the
catheterization table and their shapes are different. Be sure to use the
correct connector when connecting the footswitch.
2. When the power of the system is turned OFF, the battery of the wireless
footswitch is not charged, even if the emergency power supply cable is
connected.
Tabletop rotation
No. 2B308-307EN
142
4.8.2 Catheterization table (CAT-880B)
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Tabletop
Used to turn ON the drive power of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table after it has been turned OFF using the Emergency
stop button. Wait for at least 5 seconds after pressing the Emergency
stop button before pressing this button.
[4] Footswitch
No. 2B308-307EN
143
(2) Name of each part of the tabletop operating box
No. 2B308-307EN
144
(3) Movements of the catheterization table
Tabletop rotation
No. 2B308-307EN
145
Tabletop longitudinal tilting
(4) Footswitch
The details of the wired footswitch, refer to (3) "Footswitch (wired
footswitch)" of subsection 4.8.1. For the wireless footswitch, refer to (4)
"Wireless footswitch" of subsection 4.8.1.
No. 2B308-307EN
146
4.9 Tabletop Control Console (Option)
The tabletop control console is a console for operating the catheterization
table. The following operations can be performed.
[7] Lever
No. 2B308-307EN
147
[1] Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch
When this switch is held down, the brake for tabletop longitudinal/lateral
movement is released. When this brake is released, the tabletop can
be moved manually in the longitudinal and lateral directions.
This button engages the brake for tabletop lateral movement. When
this brake is engaged, the brake for tabletop lateral movement is not
released even when the tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake
release switch is pressed. When the tabletop is to be moved only in the
longitudinal direction, engage the brake for tabletop lateral movement.
When the brake is engaged, the button lights.
This button moves the tabletop downward. When this button is held
down, the tabletop moves downward continuously.
This button moves the tabletop upward. When this button is held down,
the tabletop moves upward continuously.
[7] Lever
No. 2B308-307EN
148
5. Safety Devices
Contents 5.1 Emergency Stop
5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies
5.3 Interlocks
5.4 Interference Warning Function
5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in Emergencies
5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation
5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy
5.8 System Reset
5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown Mode
5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure
5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study") From the
Examination Room
5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling Systems
5.13 Protecting the Personal Information of Patients
5.14 Interlock by the UPS
No. 2B308-307EN
149
5.1 Emergency Stop
(1) Stopping movement of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table
When the Emergency stop button is pressed, movement of the C-arm
support unit and catheterization table is stopped and the emergency stop
status is set. The C-arm support unit and the catheterization table become
operable only after the emergency stop status is released.
2. If the emergency stop button is pressed during X-ray exposure, the system
enters emergency stop status and X-ray exposure is stopped.
Note that X-rays can be generated without releasing emergency stop status.
No. 2B308-307EN
150
Emergency stop release
Remove the causes of the emergency stop. After ensuring safety, press the
power reset button on the operating panel of the catheterization table.
CAUTION: When the power reset button is pressed to release the emergency stop
status, wait until the emergency stop status is released (this takes
approximately 15 seconds) before performing fluoroscopy or
radiography. Otherwise, images may be affected by the movement of
the beam limiting device during the release operation, and
unnecessary X-ray exposure may result.
No. 2B308-307EN
151
5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies
If an emergency such as smoke or fire occurs or if the system cannot be
shutdown normally for some reason, the power supply of the system can be
turned OFF forcibly.
A cover for preventing inadvertent operation is provided for the Power OFF
button. Open this cover to use the Power OFF button.
WARNING: Do not use the Power OFF button to turn the system power supply OFF
in normal cases. When this button is used, the image data being
processed may not be saved.
NOTICE: Use the Power OFF button only to stop the system in an emergency. If the
power is repeatedly turned OFF using the power OFF button, the system
may malfunction.
No. 2B308-307EN
152
5.3 Interlocks
Interlocks limit the movements of the C-arm support unit and catheterization
table to prevent interference accidents. Interlocks are actuated in the
following cases.
Note, however, that tabletop vertical movement in the direction away from
the FPD touch sensor or X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor can be
performed.
<2> Hold down the Override button. Operate the support unit or catheterization
table so that the touch sensor is moved away from the contacted object.
WARNING: 1. Safety devices are not activated while the Override button is held
down. When using the Override button, be sure to prevent interference
between the support unit and persons or surrounding units.
No. 2B308-307EN
153
(2) If the support unit is too close to the floor, wall, or table
base of the catheterization table
NOTE: For the 0° layout of the DP system, if the CAS-830B approaches the CAS-
810A at the park position, an interlock is actuated.
[Restricted operation]
The support unit stops automatically. The support unit cannot be moved
further in the direction of contact.
Move the support unit away from the object causing contact.
(3) If the tabletop is too close to the floor or floor base of the
C-arm during tabletop tilting
When the catheterization table CAT-880B is used in combination, if the
tabletop is too close to the floor or floor base of the C-arm during tabletop
tilting, an interlock is activated.
[Restricted operation]
Move the tabletop away from the floor by tabletop tilting, tabletop vertical
movement, or tabletop longitudinal movement (electrically powered
operation).
In this case, move the tabletop away from the floor by tabletop vertical
movement or tabletop longitudinal movement (electrically powered
operation) and then move the tabletop to the foot end.
[Restricted operation]
No. 2B308-307EN
154
5.4 Interference Warning Function
This function issues a warning when the C-arm support unit is within the
interference range.
The interference range is the range within which the C-arm support unit is
likely to come into contact with the patient or the rear of the catheterization
tabletop. The range within which the combined two support units are likely
to come into contact with each other is also considered to be part of the
interference range.
Note that the interference warning function is not actuated while the support
unit or catheterization table in the interference range is moving in the
direction away from the interference range.
* Patient barrier
70 cm
Patient barrier
No. 2B308-307EN
155
(3) Interference range with the other support unit (DP system)
For DP systems in the 0° or 90° layout, if both of the two support units are
away from the retraction position, the system assumes that one support unit
enters the interference range of the support unit of the selected system. As
a result, the support unit slows down and a warning sound is generated.
No. 2B308-307EN
156
5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in Emergencies
(1) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement, and rotation
If the power of the catheterization table is turned OFF for some reason, the
tabletop brake cannot be released. In this case, push the tabletop of the
catheterization table strongly in the desired movement direction (lateral,
longitudinal, or rotational direction). The tabletop can be moved. If the
patient's condition changes suddenly while the power is OFF, move the
tabletop manually and secure sufficient space around the catheterization
table.
Tabletop lateral
movement
NOTE: 1. If the tabletop is locked and its movement is disabled even when the brake is
released in power ON status, tabletop locking can be released by pressing
the Override button.
In this case, select the acquisition program for the current study again.
2. If the tabletop cannot be moved manually, pull the tabletop mat in the foot-
end direction to shift the patient position.
No. 2B308-307EN
157
5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation
5.6.1 Error reset/reduced operation during fluoroscopy, radiography, or image
operations
Even if a system error related to fluoroscopy, radiography, or image
operation occurs, it is often possible to reset the error. In such cases, the
system returns to its normal operation status after the error is reset. Even
when the error cannot be reset, if the error correction function can be
activated, operation can be switched to reduced operation.
<2> If the error occurs repeatedly, click the Reduce button to switch to reduced
operation.
NOTE: If a system error for which error reset can be executed or system operation
can be switched to reduced operation occurs, the icon on the left is
displayed in the information display area on the fluoroscopic monitor.
No. 2B308-307EN
158
(2) Requesting repair
Reduced operation is a function that enables temporary use of the system in
emergencies. If an error that requires reduced operation occurs, contact
your Canon Medical Systems representative for inspection and repair.
CAUTION: When the power reset button is pressed to release the emergency stop
status, wait until the emergency stop status is released (this takes
approximately 15 seconds) before performing fluoroscopy or
radiography. Otherwise, images may be affected by the movement of
the beam limiting device during the release operation, and
unnecessary X-ray exposure may result.
No. 2B308-307EN
159
5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy
Backup fluoroscopy can be performed with the minimum functions required
for fluoroscopy maintained.
• Approximately 2 minutes after the system power is turned ON, the system
enters Backup Fluoroscopy mode. When system startup is completed, the
system exits Backup Fluoroscopy mode.
(3) Fluoroscopy
Perform fluoroscopy in the same manner as in normal fluoroscopy.
NOTE: 1. Depending on the type of system error, the backup fluoroscopy image may
be displayed only on the examination room monitor.
2. When the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in combination, the FOV size can only
be switched from the current size to the immediately larger or smaller size
during backup fluoroscopy.
No. 2B308-307EN
160
5.8 System Reset
This function is used to reset the system in the event of system failure.
There are two resetting methods: system restart and hardware resetting.
The resetting method differs depending on the error status. Referring to the
table below, confirm the error status and the location of the descriptions of
the appropriate countermeasures to be taken, and then reset the system. In
some cases, the system can be restored using this function when the system
automatically enters backup mode due to a system error.
CAUTION: Before resetting the system, ensure safety and terminate the
examination. If the system is reset during examination, the
examination is interrupted and cannot be resumed until the reset
process is completed.
No. 2B308-307EN
161
(1) System restart
The system is recovered by system restart when a system error has
occurred. System restart is effective when an error related to image
playback on the system monitor, reference monitor, or fluoroscopy monitor
or an error related to operations at the system monitors has occurred.
<1> Press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys on the keyboard together.
The System Reset screen appears. The functions of the displayed buttons
are shown in the figure below.
NOTE: 1. If the System Reset screen does not appear though the above operation is
performed, it indicates that System Resetting is not possible. In this case,
forcibly turn OFF the system power, wait for about 20 seconds, and then turn
ON the system power again to restart the system.
In emergencies, remove the catheter and guide wires in backup mode and
then forcibly turn OFF the system power.
2. If a system error has not occurred, do not reset the system. The
examination will be interrupted.
No. 2B308-307EN
162
<2> Proceed with resetting according to the system status.
*3) After the system is shut down, turn ON the system power to restart
the system.
No. 2B308-307EN
163
Resetting for DP systems
NOTICE: When part of the software is initialized by a "Partial Reset", be sure to shut
down the system. If the system continues to be used without performing
shutdown, an error may occur. The shutdown timing should be determined
according to the examination status, because shutdown processing will take
about 8 minutes.
No. 2B308-307EN
164
(2) Hardware reset
The system can be recovered by restarting only the DFP-8000C in the
following cases.
• When the system cannot be shut down by normal system power OFF
operation
<1> Press the Reset button on the DFP-8000C system main unit using a pointed
object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. The DFF-8000C is shut down and
the system is restarted immediately.
NOTICE: 1. Data that is currently being processed may be lost when system reset is
performed.
2. Do not press the Reset button in cases other than those described above.
System malfunction may result if the system is restarted repeatedly by
pressing the Reset button.
3. In the case of smoke or fire when the system power must be turned OFF
immediately, press the power OFF button. Refer to subsection 5.2 "System
Shutdown in Emergencies" for details.
4. If the system is not returned to normal status even after executing hardware
reset, restart the system by performing the following procedure.
<1> Press the power OFF button on the power ON switch box to execute forcible
system power OFF (refer to subsection 5.2 "System Shutdown in
Emergencies").
<2> Wait for 20 seconds after the system power is turned OFF and then turn the
system power ON.
No. 2B308-307EN
165
5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown Mode
It is possible to switch the current mode to Patient mode or Shutdown mode
simply by pressing the corresponding function key on the keyboard.
It is also possible to select and execute functions in the modes by using the
keyboard. Use this function when your mouse is disabled.
*1) It is not possible to select a patient from an appointment list and start a
study.
Use the keys below on the keyboard to select and execute functions.
Key Function
Used for navigating between items on the GUI, such as
buttons that can be executed and list boxes in which
Tab key
selections can be made. Each time this key is pressed, the
focus switches to the next item in the GUI.
Space key Executes the function selected in the GUI.
Sets a selection made in the GUI.
Enter key In Patient mode, this key can be used to switch between GUI
setting and entry box setting.
NOTE: The Tab, Enter, and Space keys on the keyboard also function as explained
above in modes other than Patient mode and Shutdown mode.
No. 2B308-307EN
166
5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure
X-ray exposure can be disabled forcibly. Use this function to prevent
inadvertent X-ray exposure.
NOTE: 1. X-ray exposure can be disabled using the corresponding function button (if
the X-ray exposure disable function has been assigned to a function button).
Refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of the
reference manual.
2. When the support unit is set to the retracted position (park position), X-ray
exposure is automatically disabled.
Note that the retraction positions may differ depending on the system.
No. 2B308-307EN
167
(2) Confirm that X-ray exposure is disabled.
Confirm that the following displays and buttons are lit when X-ray exposure
is disabled. Note that if X-ray exposure is disabled due to movement of the
support unit to the park position, the following displays and buttons do not
light.
NOTE: If the X-ray exposure disable function is assigned to one of the function
buttons on the main console, the assigned function button also lights when
X-ray exposure is disabled.
No. 2B308-307EN
168
5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study") From the
Examination Room
"Start Study" can be executed from the examination room. Start a study
using this method in emergencies, such as when the patient status changes
suddenly after "Finish Study" was executed and the study must be resumed
immediately.
<1> Start a study. Press the top button of the Menu operating lever on the
tableside console. After the screen for study is displayed on the
fluoroscopic/reference monitor, a study can be started.
<2> Complete a study. Perform the normal study completion method. Refer to
section 10.4 "Finish Study".
NOTE: 1. For the emergency study starting procedures when an urgent patient is
accepted, refer to subsection 10.5 "Urgent Patient Acceptance".
3. The Emergency-Study Protocol used for the study started by this operation
can be edited. For details, refer to subsection 8.2.3 "Registering a new
study protocol and editing an existing protocol" in the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
169
5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling Systems
If any abnormality occurs in the FPD cooling systems and the FPD is not
cooled properly, the FPD power is automatically turned OFF to avoid
damaging the FPD.
For the DP system, the study can be continued by switching the DP cardiac
system and the DP vascular system. In this case, turn OFF the power after
completing the study.
<2> Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for inspection and
repair of the system.
Do not use the system until inspection and repair have been completed.
NOTICE: When an error occurs in the FPD cooling system, the error message
"Abnormality in the FPD cooling unit." is displayed. In this case, stop using
the system and contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for
inspection and repair. Do not use the system until inspection and repair
have been completed.
Since the FPD cooling system may be defective in this case, if the FPD
cooling system is used as is, the FPD also may be defective.
For details of this function and the operating procedures, refer to the
reference manual.
<1> When the UPS is 100% charged, operations including fluoroscopy, support
unit movement, and catheterization table movement can be performed for
approximately 5 minutes (depending on the specifications of the UPS used).
If a message indicating a power outage is displayed, ensure safety and then
terminate the study. Set the catheterization table to the CPR position and
then shut down the system.
No. 2B308-307EN
170
6. Installation of Accessories and
Optional Units
Contents 6.1 Installing the Tableside Console
6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option)
6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps
6.4 Connecting the Cables
6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports
6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand
6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm)
6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option)
6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option)
6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option)
6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option)
6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch (Option)
6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option)
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band (CAT-880B)
6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B)
6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail (CAT-880B)
6.17 Mounting the Tabletop Control Console
6.18 Mounting the Tablet Console
6.19 Other Catheterization Table Options
6.20 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer
No. 2B308-307EN
171
6.1 Installing the Tableside Console
6.1.1 Installing the tableside console
To remove the tableside console, lift it while pulling the lever toward you.
Mounting hook
Lever
CAUTION: When installing the tableside console on the accessory mounting rail
of the catheterization table, engage the tableside console mounting
hook with the accessory mounting rail. If the hook is not properly
engaged with the rail, the tableside console may fall and be damaged.
If the tableside console falls, it may malfunction even if it does not
appear to be damaged. It should be inspected by Canon Medical
Systems service personnel before it is used.
No. 2B308-307EN
172
(2) Setting the installation position of the tableside console
The installation position of the tableside console should be set in the system.
Otherwise, the lever tilt directions and the support unit operating directions
may not match.
<1> Press the Auto-positioning selection button and confirm that it lights.
<2> Hold down the Override button on the tableside console and press the 0 key.
<Left side>
<Right side>
No. 2B308-307EN
173
<3> While holding down the Override button, press and release the 0 key
successively until the mounting position to be set is displayed in the warning
display section.
Each time the 0 key is pressed with the Override button held down, the
tableside console position setting changes in the order below.
<4> After the mounting position is displayed on the warning display section, do
not press the Override button and 0 key for 5 seconds.
The selected position is saved and the position display in the warning display
section on the reference monitor goes out.
No. 2B308-307EN
174
6.1.2 Installing the tabletop operating box (CAT-880B)
<1> Move the peripheral units outside the movement range of the catheterization
table.
<2> Press the tabletop forward movement button or backward movement button
on the tabletop operating box.
<3> If the tabletop moves as intended, setting is not necessary. If it moves in the
direction opposite to that intended, switch the movement directions assigned
to these buttons using the tabletop longitudinal movement direction reversal
switch at the bottom of the tabletop operating box.
<4> Press the tabletop forward movement button or backward movement button
on the tabletop operating box to confirm that the tabletop moves as intended.
No. 2B308-307EN
175
6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option)
(1) Installing the satellite console on the dedicated stand
Mount the satellite console and the satellite tablet console on the accessory
mounting rail of the dedicated stand. For the installation procedure, refer to
subsection 6.1 "Installing the Tableside Console".
CAUTION: 1. The satellite console must be installed on the accessory mounting rail
of the dedicated stand. If the satellite console is placed at a location
other than that specified (such as on the floor), an accident may result.
2. Do not place the dedicated stand for the satellite console under the
tabletop of the catheterization table.
If the stand and the tabletop come into contact, damage or a system
malfunction may result.
NOTICE: If the satellite console stand is used, observe the following precautions to
avoid the console falling and becoming damaged.
• Do not place the stand on a sloping floor or within the movement range of
each unit.
• Do not entangle your feet in the satellite console cable.
• Mount the satellite console at the center of the accessory mounting rail.
• Mount/hang only the satellite console on the stand.
• When operating the system, lock the brake of the stand.
No. 2B308-307EN
176
(1.1) Satellite console stand
The brake is
released.
The brake is
applied.
This stand is for mounting both the satellite console and the satellite tablet
console. Mount the tablet console on the upper level of the accessory
mounting rail and mount the satellite console on the lower level of the
accessory mounting rail.
No. 2B308-307EN
177
(2) Saving the installation position
In the same manner as for the tableside console, save the satellite console
installation position.
For the saving procedure, refer to subsection 6.1 "Installing the tableside
console".
Save the position using the Override button and the 0 key on the satellite
console. Note that the orientation of the satellite console relative to the
catheterization table should be as shown in the figure below.
No. 2B308-307EN
178
6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps
Be sure to use the system with sterile caps mounted to the sections
specified below in order to prevent secondary infection due to blood and to
prevent system malfunction or incorrect operation due to contrast medium.
CAUTION: Use a sterile cap that meets the conditions below. Using a sterile cap
that does not meet these conditions may result in incorrect operation,
incorrect movement, or system malfunction.
• Transparent
The sterile cap must be mounted so that it covers the entire console as
shown in the figure below.
No. 2B308-307EN
179
(2) Mounting the sterile cap to the FPD
Mount a sterile cap to the FPD.
The sterile cap must be mounted so that it covers the entire FPD as shown
in the figure below.
CAUTION: 1. When mounting a sterile cap to the FPD, do not apply pressure to the
front surface of the FPD. Doing so actuates the touch sensor mounted
on the front surface of the FPD, and FPD away movement is performed,
resulting in a risk of hand injury if your hand becomes caught in the
system. If the touch sensor is actuated, immediately remove your hand
from the front surface of the FPD. FPD movement stops.
2. Make sure that the FPD near/away movement switches are completely
covered by a sterile cap. If the FPD near/away movement switches are
not covered with a sterile cap, blood may remain on the switches
during operation, resulting in a risk of secondary infection.
NOTICE: Do not cover the lifter cover with a sterile cap. If the lifter cover is covered, it
may come off or be damaged during FPD near/away movement.
No. 2B308-307EN
180
(3) Mounting the sterile cap to the footswitch
Mount a sterile cap to the footswitch of the catheterization table.
The sterile cap must be mounted so that it covers the entire footswitch as
shown in the figure below.
No. 2B308-307EN
181
6.4 Connecting the Cables
When the following units are used, connect the connectors of the cables
from each unit to the corresponding connectors of the catheterization table.
Confirm the positions of the connectors of the catheterization table.
CAUTION: 1. Before connecting the cables of the units used in combination to the
catheterization table, be sure to turn OFF the power of the system and
units used in combination. If the cables are connected with the power
ON, an electric shock or malfunction may occur.
Equipotential terminal
No. 2B308-307EN
182
(2) Connecting with the CAT-880B
No. 2B308-307EN
183
6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports
When performing diagnosis, be sure to use the tabletop mat and the arm
supports.
WARNING: To prevent the patient's arm or hand from getting caught, mount the
arm supports to the catheterization table.
NOTICE: Make sure that the tabletop mat does not protrude from the tabletop.
If the tabletop mat is not aligned properly with the tabletop, shadows caused
by the mat may appear on images.
No. 2B308-307EN
184
6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand
NOTICE: 1. Do not hang an object weighing 2 kg or more on one side of the drip infusion
stand or objects weighing 4 kg or more on both sides of the drip infusion
stand. Doing so may cause the stand to fall over.
2. When operating the tabletop, be careful not to allow the drip infusion stand to
interfere with other units such as the support unit and the monitor
suspension unit.
<1> Insert the drip infusion stand fixing fitting into the accessory mounting rail.
<2> Insert the drip infusion stand into the pipe of the fixing fitting.
<3> Turn the knob of the fixing fitting clockwise to fix the drip infusion stand.
<2>
<1> <3>
Accessory mounting rail
Knob of the fixing fitting
Drip infusion stand fixing fitting
No. 2B308-307EN
185
6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm)
After placing the patient on the catheterization table, insert the armrest under
the tabletop mat.
Armrest
WARNING: 1. Do not place anything other than the patient's arm on the armrest.
Also, do not allow the armrest to be subjected to a force of more than
100 N (approximately 10 kgf). If these instructions are not followed, the
armrest may be damaged and the patient may be injured.
2. Take special care to prevent interference between the armrest and the
support unit. If the armrest contacts the support unit, the armrest may
be damaged and the patient may be injured.
No. 2B308-307EN
186
6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option)
Armrests for both arms of the patient are provided as an option.
The armrests are required for the Sones method.
<1> Remove the tabletop mat and place the armrest mounting plate on the
tabletop.
<2> Attach the armrest mounting plate securely to the tabletop using the fixing
bands.
Fixing bands
<3> Insert the armrests into the armrest mounting brackets attached to the
mounting plate.
<4> There are three settings for the mounting angle. The angle changes
according to the groove into which the angle adjustment shaft is inserted.
• To set the armrest to the horizontal position, slide the shaft out from the
groove.
• To tilt the armrest upward, insert the shaft into the inner groove.
WARNING: Before using the armrests, confirm that armrest shafts are fully
inserted into the mounting section holes. If the armrest shafts are not
inserted properly, the armrests may come off during use and the
patient may be injured.
No. 2B308-307EN
187
6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option)
The arm holder consists of the mounting section, the arm holder section, and
the handgrip section.
(A)
(B) Lever
<2> Insert the handgrips into the grooves of the mounting section.
<3> Instruct the patient to place his/her arms on the arm holder. Then instruct
the patient to hold the handgrips as shown in the figure below.
<4> Adjust the positions of the handgrips according to the patient physique. After
adjustment, turn the adjustment knobs to lock the handgrips.
Arm holder
Handgrip
Adjustment knob
No. 2B308-307EN
188
6.9.2 Arm holder for the CAT-880B
Mark
<2> To secure the mounting section to the tabletop, turn the lever to set it to
the (B) position. To remove the mounting section from the tabletop, turn the
lever to set it to the (A) position.
(A)
(B)
Lever
No. 2B308-307EN
189
(2) Mounting the holder sections and adjusting the handgrips
<1> Insert the ends of the arm holders securely into the grooves of the mounting
sections.
<2> Insert the handgrips into the holes of the mounting sections.
<3> Instruct the patient to place his/her arms on the arm holders. Then instruct
the patient to hold the handgrips as shown in the figure in subsection
6.9.1 (2).
<4> Adjust the positions of the handgrips according to the patient physique. After
adjustment, turn the adjustment knobs to lock the handgrips.
Arm holder
Handgrip
Adjustment knob
No. 2B308-307EN
190
6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option)
Install the arm cover on the catheterization table if required.
<1> Place the arm cover on the tabletop and secure it using the two securing
bands on the tabletop.
Tabletop mat
Arm cover
Securing band
No. 2B308-307EN
191
6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option)
Use the leg securing band to prevent leg movement during stepping DSA.
<1> Move the lock lever to engage the lever with the notch.
<1> Disengage the lock lever from the notch and return it to the previous position.
Lock lever
Lock lever Securing band
<1>
<1> <2> <2>
Knob
No. 2B308-307EN
192
(2) Securing the patient's legs
<1> Insert the leg securing band into the accessory mounting rail at the tabletop
side.
<2> Pull out the securing band and engage the band-end hook with the
accessory mounting rail on the other side. At this time, maintain the
securing band tension so that the hook is not disengaged.
<3> While maintaining the securing band tension, wind the securing band without
causing the patient pain.
Accessory
mounting rail
Hook
No. 2B308-307EN
193
6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch (Option)
The tabletop control switch can be installed on the accessory mounting rails
on the left/right sides of the catheterization table. Install the tabletop control
switch at a position where operation can be performed easily. It is not
possible to place the tabletop control switch at a position away from the
catheterization table main unit.
(1) Installation
<1> Install the tabletop control switch. Pull the tabletop control switch lever
toward you and install the switch to the rail as is. When the lever is released,
the switch is secured.
<2> Install the two cable hooks to the rail. A hook must be installed near the foot
end of the table.
<3> Hang the tabletop control switch cable using the two hooks.
<4> Confirm that the tabletop control switch cable does not interfere with
operation of the catheterization table. Slowly move the tabletop of the
catheterization table in the lateral and longitudinal directions and confirm that
the tabletop moves to the stroke end with sufficient slack of the cable. Also
confirm that the cable does not get caught by the catheterization table.
(2) Removal
<1> Remove the tabletop control switch. Pull the tabletop control switch lever
toward you and lift it as is.
To change the position of the tabletop control switch on the rail, slide the
switch while pulling the lever.
Cable
Mounting/removing the
tabletop control switch
No. 2B308-307EN
194
6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option)
<1> Remove the standard tabletop mat from the tabletop of the catheterization
table.
The folded end of the tabletop mat fastener should be facing down.
Head end
Foot end
Fastener
<3> Place a sheet over the tabletop mat if required. This may make it easier to
move the patient on the tabletop mat.
<4> If accessories or options for the system (such as the arm support or armrest)
are used, there may be some unevenness between the tabletop and the
tabletop mat. In this case, place a piece of cloth or a cushion over the
uneven area.
Tabletop
Place a piece of cloth or a cushion
to correct the unevenness.
No. 2B308-307EN
195
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band (CAT-880B)
Two patient immobilization bands are used to secure the patient on the
catheterization table. They are wound around the patient's chest and
abdomen. Be sure to use both bands.
CAUTION: 1. Do not allow the patient immobilization band to bear the entire weight
of the patient.
3. The service life of the patient immobilization band is one year. It must
be replaced with a new band within one year from first use. The
expiration date for use must be written on the label of the patient
immobilization band (refer to the figure below) using permanent ink.
This expiration date must be checked against the current date before
each use. If the patient immobilization band is used for more than one
year, it may deteriorate and break, or the Velcro tape may come off.
Fluffing on the Velcro tape, abrasion or damage on the patient
immobilization band, etc. are signs that a new patient immobilization
band should be used, even if it has been in use for less than one year.
To obtain a new patient immobilization band, contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative.
(MONTH/YEAR)
19803001
No. 2B308-307EN
196
<1> Wind one of the patient immobilization bands around the patient and tabletop
and tighten it using Velcro A.
<2> Pull the patient immobilization band and additionally tighten it using Velcro B.
<4> Confirm that the patient is fully immobilized by the patient immobilization
band.
<5> Place the second patient immobilization band around the patient and tighten
it in the same way.
Velcro B Velcro A
Velcro C
No. 2B308-307EN
197
6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B)
Mount the drape holder on the tabletop as required.
CAUTION: Observe the following precautions when using the drape holder.
Failure to observe these precautions may result in injury to the patient
or operator or damage to the system.
b. Be careful to avoid contact between the drape holder and the support
unit.
c. Do not hang anything other than the drape on the drape holder.
<1> Insert the clamp for the drape holder into the tabletop at a location between
the end of the tabletop and the marks.
<3> Confirm that the drape holder is securely mounted to the tabletop.
<4> Adjust the bar angle by loosening the bar angle locking knob.
<5> Adjust the bar length by loosening the bar length locking knob.
<6> Tighten the bar angle locking knob and the bar length locking knob.
No. 2B308-307EN
198
6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail (CAT-880B)
Mount the accessory tabletop rail on the tabletop as required.
WARNING: 1. When the accessory tabletop rail (option) with heavy components (*1)
installed on it is used in combination, the maximum allowable load on
the catheterization table is 220 kg. Do not place a patient whose mass
exceeds 220 kg on the table because the tabletop may be damaged and
the patient may be injured.
Note that 20 kg is the maximum limit when the center of gravity of the
mounted object is immediately above the rail ("A" in the following
figure). Depending on its center of gravity, even an object that weighs
less than 20 kg may not be mountable. For example, if the center of
gravity of the object to be mounted is 100 mm away from the rail ("B" in
the following figure), the maximum permissible mass of the object is
10 kg. Refer to the following figure for details.
No. 2B308-307EN
199
CAUTION: Observe the following precautions when using the accessory tabletop
rail.
Failure to observe these precautions may result in injury to the patient
or operator or damage to the system.
2. Be careful to avoid contact between the accessory tabletop rail and the
support unit.
<1> Insert the clamp for the accessory tabletop rail into the tabletop at a location
between the end of the tabletop and the marks.
<3> Confirm that the accessory tabletop rail is securely mounted to the tabletop.
No. 2B308-307EN
200
6.17 Mounting the Tabletop Control Console
The tabletop control console is mounted on the accessory mounting rail of
the catheterization table. Mount the console at a convenient location. Note
that the tabletop control console cable cannot be removed from the
catheterization table.
Catheterization table
CAUTION: Fully engage the console mounting hook of the tabletop control
console with the accessory mounting rail. If the hook is not fully
engaged with the rail, the console may fall and be damaged.
If the console falls, it may malfunction even if it does not appear to be
damaged. The console should be inspected by Canon Medical
Systems service personnel before it is used.
No. 2B308-307EN
201
NOTICE: 1. When mounting/removing the tabletop control console, be sure not to press
the tabletop DOWN movement button. The tabletop of the catheterization
table may be lowered and the tabletop may come into contact with peripheral
units.
2. Do not pull the cable of the tabletop control console. If strong force is
applied to the cable, the cable connectors of the tabletop control console and
catheterization table may be damaged.
<2> While pulling the lever, lift the console to remove it.
<2> While pulling the lever, engage the mounting hook of the console with the rail.
The console can be moved along the rail when the lever is pulled.
<3> Release the lever and confirm that the console is securely engaged.
No. 2B308-307EN
202
(3) Cable handling
Handle the tabletop control console cable carefully to avoid interference
when the catheterization table is moved.
<1> Mount the two cable hooks on the rail. Mount one hook on the foot-end side
of the table.
<2> Hang the tabletop control console cables using the two hooks.
<3> Confirm that the tabletop control console cable does not interfere with
movement of the catheterization table.
Carefully move the tabletop of the catheterization table in the lateral and
longitudinal directions to confirm that the cable is not subjected to excessive
strain at the stroke ends. Also confirm that the cable is not caught by the
catheterization table.
Hook
Cable
No. 2B308-307EN
203
6.18 Installing the Tablet Console
Install the tablet console on the catheterization table as shown below. Use
the lever to lock or release the mounting hook. Confirm that the tablet
console is installed securely before using it.
CAUTION: 1. Cover the tablet console with a sterile cap before use.
No. 2B308-307EN
204
6.19 Other Catheterization Table Options
For the operating procedures for the optional units listed in the table below,
refer to the operation manual for each optional unit.
No. 2B308-307EN
205
6.20 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer
If this system is used in the USA, add the detachable spacer at the X-ray
beam limiting device touch sensor. The SSD (Source-to-skin distance) is
restricted to the minimum SSD, or 38 cm.
Note, however, if this system is used for specific surgical applications, it is
allowed to remove the detachable spacer.
After the detachable spacer is removed, the minimum SSD is 30 cm.
No. 2B308-307EN
206
7. Daily Checks
Contents 7.1 Checks Before Operation
7.2 Checks After Operation
No. 2B308-307EN
207
7.1 Checks Before Operation
Be sure to perform the required checks before starting operation. Make a
copy of the check sheet provided at the end of this operation manual and
use it when performing inspection.
CAUTION: If any system abnormality is found during the checks before operation,
stop using the system and post a sign reading "DO NOT USE" on the
system. Then contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative for inspection and repair.
• Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
• Confirm that there is no object that may cause interference within the
operation ranges of the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor
suspension unit.
• Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
• Confirm that each unit is cleaned and sterilized.
• Confirm that there are no objects that may come into contact with the
footswitch in the surrounding area.
• Confirm that the battery of the wireless footswitch is charged. (*1)
No. 2B308-307EN
208
(2) Checks after turning ON the power
(a) Checks in the control room
• Confirm that the drive power of the support unit and catheterization table
is turned OFF when the Emergency stop button is pressed.
• In the emergency stop status, confirm that the drive power can be turned
ON using the Power reset button on the operating panel of the
catheterization table.
Check the following statuses while the touch sensor is being pressed.
Perform the check for each touch sensor. Also, check at least four positions
on each touch sensor. For the touch sensor locations, refer to subsection
4.7 "X-ray Tube Support Unit".
No. 2B308-307EN
209
(e) Operational checks
No. 2B308-307EN
210
(g) Checks before operation for the units to be used in combination
Perform checks before operation for the units to be used in combination with
this system, such as the injector (contrast medium injector), and confirm that
there are no abnormalities.
For the procedures for the checks before operation, refer to the operation
manual provided with each unit used in combination.
• Fluoroscopic monitor
• Reference monitor
• Backup monitor (when a large-screen monitor is used)
No. 2B308-307EN
211
7.2 Checks After Operation
Perform the following checks after operation to prepare for the next
examination.
• Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
• Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
Also, turn OFF the power switch of the power distribution board.
When the wireless footswitch (option) is used, use the supplied AC adaptor
to charge the footswitch battery.
No. 2B308-307EN
212
8. Turning the System Power ON/OFF
Contents 8.1 Turning the System Power ON
8.2 Turning the System Power OFF (System Shutdown)
No. 2B308-307EN
213
8.1 Turning the System Power ON
<1> Turn ON the power switches of the power distribution boards of the
examination room and the control room.
<2> Perform the required checks before operation (before turning the power
supply ON).
CAUTION: 1. Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming studies
after several hours has elapsed since the system power was turned
OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait for at least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning ON
the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear and then start a study.
2. After the power is turned ON, wait at least two minutes before
operating the switches. Failure to do so may generate an error. In
such a case, wait until startup processing is completed and then
restart the system (turning the power OFF and then ON).
No. 2B308-307EN
214
NOTICE: Except in emergencies, wait for approximately 20 seconds after the power
has been turned OFF before turning the power ON again. Failure to do so
may cause a system malfunction.
NOTE: 1. Approximately 2 minutes after the power is turned ON, backup fluoroscopy is
enabled.
For details of backup fluoroscopy, refer to subsection 5.7 "Backup
Fluoroscopy".
No. 2B308-307EN
215
8.2 Turning the System Power OFF (System Shutdown)
This subsection describes the normal shutdown procedures.
For the procedure for turning the system power OFF immediately in an
emergency, refer to subsection 5.2 "System Shutdown in Emergencies".
⇒ When the OK button is clicked, the system power is turned OFF after
approximately 1 minute and 30 seconds.
No. 2B308-307EN
216
WARNING: 1. If the power is turned OFF using the Power OFF button for emergency
stop, the image data that is being processed may not be saved.
2. Do not turn OFF the main power switch on the power distribution board
while system shutdown processing is being performed. If the button is
turned OFF during shutdown processing, data may be lost.
NOTICE: 1. Do not turn OFF the system power until the used heat storage capacity of
the X-ray tube anode decreases to 30%. If the system power is turned OFF
while the used heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube anode is still high, the
X-ray tube assembly may malfunction.
2. If the power is turned OFF repeatedly using the Power OFF button for
emergency stop, the system may malfunction.
3. If the following operation(s) are performed, the X-ray tube may malfunction
or its service life may be shortened.
• The Power OFF button for emergency stop is pressed during the period from
when the system power is turned ON to when system startup is completed.
• The main power switch on the power distribution board is turned OFF while
system shutdown processing is being performed.
• The support unit is not at the standard position (LAO/RAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°)
when the system power is turned OFF. Before shutting down the system,
set the support unit to the standard position.
No. 2B308-307EN
217
NOTE: 1. If shutdown processing is performed while a study is in progress, the
following message is displayed. When the OK button is clicked, the study is
aborted and the power of the system is turned OFF.
To terminate the study normally, click the CANCEL button, terminate the
study in Patient mode (Finish Study), and then shut down the system.
2. If the system power is turned OFF due to a power failure, reboot the system
by performing the standard system power ON procedures after the power is
recovered.
To reboot the system, perform the normal power ON operation.
If a power failure occurs while image acquisition or data transfer is in
progress, image acquisition or data transfer may not be completed normally.
Therefore, check the acquired images or transferred data. If the check
reveals that a process is not completed normally, acquire images or transfer
data again.
Note that the power requirements of the system are extremely high;
therefore, the system cannot be used with a standalone power generator.
3. If the system is shut down or the power supply to the system is interrupted
due to a power failure during an examination and the system is then started
up again, the discontinued examination is resumed automatically.
No. 2B308-307EN
218
9. Operating Procedures for Units in
the Examination Room
This section describes the operating procedures for the units included in the
system configuration in the examination room.
For the operating procedures for optional units and units manufactured by
companies other than Canon Medical Systems, refer to the operation
manual supplied with each applicable unit.
No. 2B308-307EN
219
WARNING: 1. Before starting operation, move objects present in the "operating
ranges when the system is used normally" outside the ranges. These
ranges are specified in the following figures. If any objects required for
examination must be located within the ranges, special care is required
so that they do not interfere with the system.
2. Do not enter the area where the clearance between the C-arm and the
floor becomes small (shaded section in the figure below). Your feet
may be caught between the C-arm and the floor.
Do not place any objects (such as the footswitch) on the floor in this
area.
<Operating range when the floor-mounted C-arm support unit and the
catheterization table are in the normal use status>
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
No. 2B308-307EN
220
WARNING: 3. Physicians, radiological technologists, and nurses should be careful
not to catch their hands in moving sections of the support unit or
catheterization table.
In particular, special care must be taken to ensure that their hands are
not caught between the FPD and the FPD support section cover or
between the C-arm and C-arm support section.
NOTE: For the DP vascular system (CAS-830B used), the display angle of the
image displayed on the monitor is automatically adjusted so that the
direction toward the end of the catheterization table is always at the top. The
display angle does not change even when the support arm rotation angle of
the C-arm support unit or the FPD rotation angle is changed.
The automatic adjustment function for the display angle is canceled in the
following cases.
• When manual rotation operation is performed for the FPD (the X-ray
exposure field adjustment lever on the tableside console is rotated)
• When the X-ray exposure field adjustment lever on the table side console is
pressed
No. 2B308-307EN
221
9.1 Operating Procedures for the Support Unit
WARNING: 1. X-ray generation is possible whenever the support unit is not at the
park position. Be extremely careful not to perform X-ray exposure
inadvertently.
No. 2B308-307EN
222
■ Names of the support unit setting positions
The typical setting positions of the support unit are listed below.
Name Position
C-arm set position Support column rotation angle : 0°
C-arm park position C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
(setting at the time of C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
shipment)
Support column rotation angle : +90° or -90°
C-arm standard status C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
Standard status of the C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm set at the C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
head-end
Support column rotation angle : 0° (C-arm set position)
Standard status of the C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm set on the C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
patient's right side
Support column rotation angle : -90°
Standard status of the C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm set on the C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
patient's left side
Support column rotation angle : 90°
No. 2B308-307EN
223
■ Operating procedures for the CAS-810A/A2
<2> Rotate the C-arm slowly while holding the handle and holding down the park
button.
[To lock the support unit to the set position (support column rotation angle
0º)]
(a) Align the pointer with the pointer. A click sound is heard and the C-arm
is set at the position.
(b) Release the support column rotation park button. The brake is actuated and
the support column is locked.
[To lock the support unit at the park position (support column rotation angle
+90º/-90º)]
Gently push the C-arm until it reaches the park position. The brake is
automatically actuated when the C-arm reaches the park position.
No. 2B308-307EN
224
NOTICE: 1. Reduce the support unit movement speed before it reaches the park
position. If the support unit is moving at high speed when it reaches the park
position (movement limit position), the physical shock may result in
malfunction.
2. Do not release the support column rotation park button while the C-arm is
moving. If the brake is actuated while the C-arm is moving, the sensor etc.
may be adversely affected and readjustment may be required.
NOTE: 1. The C-arm can be locked at the desired position. Move the C-arm to the
desired position and release the support column rotation park button after
the C-arm has stopped. The brake is actuated and the support unit is locked
at that position.
2. If the C-arm is locked at a position other than the set position (support
column rotation angle 0º), all motor-driven movements of the support unit are
disabled to ensure safety.
3. If the pointers are aligned but a click sound is not heard, it is necessary to
adjust the system. In this case, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
225
(2) C-arm rotation/sliding
No. 2B308-307EN
226
(3) FPD near/away movement
As described below, there are two methods for performing FPD near/away
movement.
No. 2B308-307EN
227
■ Operating procedures for the CAS-830B/A1
No. 2B308-307EN
228
(2) Support column rotation
No. 2B308-307EN
229
(3) C-arm rotation/C-arm sliding
NOTE: When anatomical angle control is selected, it is always possible to angulate the
C-arm with respect to the patient. It is not necessary to change the operating
procedures depending on the C-arm position.
To perform operations under the anatomical angle control, press the
Anatomical angle control selection button and confirm that this button lights in
step <1> of the above operating procedures.
No. 2B308-307EN
230
(4) Change of the SID (FPD near/away movement)
As described below, there are two methods for performing FPD near/away
movement.
[Remote control]
[Local control]
No. 2B308-307EN
231
(5) Manual operation for FPD rotation
The FPD can be rotated in the desired direction. The X-ray beam limiting
device is automatically rotated to match FPD rotation.
If the FPD used in combination is the 12 × 16-inch FPD, the FPD set position
can also be changed.
The set position of the FPD can be switched between portrait or landscape.
Portrait Position where the longer sides of the FPD are parallel to the
patient axis
Landscape Position where the shorter sides of the FPD are parallel to the
patient axis
No. 2B308-307EN
232
■ Rotation and opening closing of compensation filters
<1> The left, right, and central compensation filters can be opened/closed or
rotated independently.
NOTE: 1. The left and right compensation filters can be used for two different purposes
by interchanging their positions. For the interchanging the positions of the
left and right compensation filters, refer to subsection 11.6.9 "Function
setting".
No. 2B308-307EN
233
■ Opening/closing the blades of the X-ray beam limiting device
(setting the X-ray exposure field)
Normally, the X-ray beam limiting device blades are opened/closed
automatically by the auto collimation function, resulting in the X-ray exposure
field being set automatically. This subsection describes the manual
operation method.
<1> Use the X-ray exposure field adjustment lever to open/close the blades of
the X-ray beam limiting device.
(b) Adjustment in the vertical direction : Tilt the lever toward you/away from
you.
NOTE: 1. The X-ray exposure field can also be adjusted using the X-ray exposure field
adjustment lever on the main console.
2. If the X-ray beam limiting device blades are operated manually, the auto
collimation function is automatically set to OFF. When the X-ray exposure
field size is adjusted to the FPD size by manual operation, manual operation
mode is automatically switched to auto-collimation mode.
3. For DP vascular systems, the X-ray exposure field size adjustment direction
differs depending on whether or not the support column rotation angle of the
support unit (CAS-830B) is within the range from +45° to -45°. The
explanation given above is for manual operation when the support column
rotation angle is within range from +45° to -45°.
4. If the beam limiting device blades cannot be operated, press the emergency
stop button followed by the power reset button to release the error. For
details of the procedures and the locations of the emergency stop button and
the power reset button, refer to subsection 5.1 "Emergency Stop".
No. 2B308-307EN
234
■ Changing the FOV size
<1> To change the size, use the FOV size selection button.
NOTE: 1. The FOV size selection button on the main console can also be used to
adjust the FOV size.
2. When the live zoom magnification ratio is set to 1.0, if operation is attempted
to further reduce the minimum FOV size, the live zoom magnification ratio is
switched by two steps and the image is magnified by two steps. Note that
the FOV value is calculated using the FOV size and the magnification ratio
for live zoom at that time and displayed on the monitor (*1).
FOV switch 20 cm → 17 cm → 15 cm → 12 cm → 12 cm → 12 cm →
(8 inches) (7 inches) (6 inches) (5 inches) (5 inches) (5 inches)
Magnification 1.0 → 1.0 → 1.0 → 1.0 → 1.2 (*2) 1.4 (*2)
ratio for live (automatically (automatically
zoom switched) switched)
FOV display 20 cm 17 cm 15 cm 12 cm 10 cm (*3) 9 cm (*3)
(8 inches) (7 inches) (6 inches) (5 inches) (4.2 inches) (3.6 inches)
Return
*1) On the Acquisition tab on the system monitor, the FOV size and the
magnification ratio for live zoom are displayed separately.
*2) For systems with the 12-inch FPD or 12 × 16-inch FPD, the magnification
ratio is switched to 1.4 and 1.8, in that order.
No. 2B308-307EN
235
■ Mounting/removing the X-ray grid
CAUTION: 1. Do not allow liquid such as water or an object such as a pin or clip to
enter the X-ray grid insertion port. Doing so may result in a fire,
electric shock, or malfunction of the unit. In addition, the liquid or
object may appear on acquired images. If liquid or an object enters the
grid insertion port, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative immediately.
2. Confirm that the X-ray grid is securely mounted before starting the
examination. If the X-ray grid is not securely mounted, it may fall out,
causing personal injury.
4. For 3D-DSA or AlphaCT, the X-ray grid must be used if it was used
during image acquisition for calibration and must not be used if it was
not used. Otherwise, errors or artifacts may occur in the 3D
reconstruction results (3D image).
5. Handle the X-ray grid with extreme care. If the X-ray grid is scratched
or deformed, both fluoroscopic and radiographic images may be
affected. Pay particular attention to the following points.
• When the window is white () : The X-ray grid is mounted properly.
• When the window is black () : The X-ray grid is not mounted properly or is
not used.
<3> Confirm that the grid mounting confirmation window is white (). If it is
black (), the X-ray grid is not mounted properly. Push the X-ray grid all the
way into the grid insertion port.
No. 2B308-307EN
236
(3) Removing the X-ray grid
<1> Press the grid eject button.
<2> Pull out the X-ray grid horizontally from the grid insertion port, taking care not
to drop it.
No. 2B308-307EN
237
9.2 Operating Procedures for the Catheterization Table
CAUTION: Confirm that there are no objects that may interfere with the tabletop
within the movement range of the tabletop. Note that the lower section
of the tabletop is obstructed from view.
No. 2B308-307EN
238
■ Operating procedures for the CAT-850B
NOTICE: If the sound of braking is heard frequently when stopping vertical movement
of the tabletop of the catheterization table, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative for adjustment. The stop position may have shifted
(for example, due to the abrasion of parts), actuating automatic braking.
Note, however, that it is not abnormal to hear the sound of braking when the
power is turned OFF.
No. 2B308-307EN
239
(2) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement
<1> Select the sliding direction of the tabletop.
The tabletop can be slid in both the longitudinal and lateral directions. To
restrict sliding to the lateral direction, set the tabletop lateral movement lock
button to ON (lit).
Push the tabletop while holding down the tabletop longitudinal/lateral brake
release lever.
To lock the tabletop, stop the tabletop and then release the tabletop
longitudinal/lateral brake release lever.
Tabletop longitudinal/lateral
brake release lever
No. 2B308-307EN
240
(3) Tabletop rotation
CAUTION: Do not touch the tabletop control switch (option) when the tabletop is
being rotated. If the tabletop control switch is pressed unintentionally,
the tabletop will slide in the longitudinal and lateral directions when the
tabletop is rotated, possibly causing an accident.
<1> If tabletop rotation is locked, release tabletop rotation. Pull out the tabletop
locking shaft on the side of the table until the rotation release indicator (red)
is visible.
Press the tabletop rotation brake release button . The button lights
No. 2B308-307EN
241
<3> Rotate the tabletop.
Push the tabletop slowly. The tabletop rotation center position display
lights when the tabletop is rotated to the 0° or 180° position. Stop the
tabletop at the desired position.
After the tabletop has come to a complete stop, press the tabletop rotation
brake release button (the button is lit). The brake operates to secure
To secure the tabletop, stop the tabletop and then press the tabletop rotation
Note that when a period of 10 seconds elapses after the brake is released,
the brake is automatically actuated and the tabletop is immobilized.
<5> Tabletop rotation can be securely locked at the 0° position using the tabletop
locking shaft. When it is necessary to prevent unexpected tabletop rotation,
such as during patient transfer, push the tabletop locking shaft into the table
until the rotation release indicator (red) is not visible.
NOTE: The tabletop locking shaft cannot be pushed when the tabletop is not at the
0° position. Be sure to set the tabletop at the 0° position.
No. 2B308-307EN
242
(4) Tabletop operation using the tabletop control console
NOTICE: 1. Do not press the buttons on the tabletop control console strongly. If
excessive force is used, the console may be disengaged from the
catheterization table and sustain damage.
2. Do not pull the cable of the tabletop control console. If strong force is
applied to the cable, the cable connectors of the tabletop control console and
catheterization table may be damaged.
Press the tabletop UP movement button at the rear of the tabletop control
console.
Press the tabletop DOWN movement button at the front of the tabletop
control console.
No. 2B308-307EN
243
(4.2) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement operation
<1> When the tabletop is to be moved in both of the longitudinal and lateral
directions
Confirm that the tabletop lateral movement lock button is not lit. If the button
is lit, press the button so that it is not lit.
Confirm that the tabletop lateral movement lock button is lit. If the button is
not lit, press the button so that it is lit.
<1> Hold down the tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch.
<2> Manually move the tabletop while holding down the tabletop
longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch.
<3> To lock tabletop movement, stop tabletop movement and then release the
tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch.
No. 2B308-307EN
244
(4.3) Tabletop rotation operation
CAUTION: When rotating the tabletop, be careful not to touch the tabletop control
console. If the tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release
switch is pressed unintentionally, the tabletop may move in the
longitudinal and lateral directions simultaneously while the tabletop is
rotating.
Press the tabletop rotation brake release button and confirm that the button
is lit.
Manually move the tabletop carefully. The tabletop rotation center position
indicator lights when the tabletop rotation angle is 0° or 180°.
<3> To lock tabletop movement, stop tabletop movement and then press the
tabletop rotation brake release button. The button goes out and tabletop
movement is locked. About ten seconds after the brake is released, the
brake engages automatically and tabletop movement is locked.
No. 2B308-307EN
245
Operating procedures for the CAT-880B
WARNING: When the catheterization table is being tilted, always visually confirm
that the tilting direction is correct. If incorrect operation is performed
and the tabletop tilts in the wrong direction, the patient may fall off the
tabletop.
CAUTION: 1. Confirm that there are no objects that may interfere with the tabletop
within the movement range of the tabletop. Pay particular attention to
the area under the tabletop because it is a blind spot.
NOTE: For the tabletop movement directions and locations of the switches on the
tabletop operating box, refer to subsection 4.8.2 "Catheterization table
(CAT-880B)".
<1> Press the tabletop lateral movement lock button of the tabletop operating
box and confirm that the button lights.
<2> Hold down the tabletop operating knob of the tabletop operating box and
manually move the tabletop in the desired direction.
NOTE: When the tabletop is in the horizontal position, it is also possible to move the
tabletop in the longitudinal and lateral directions at the same time. For the
operating procedure, refer to step (3) "Tabletop lateral movement".
No. 2B308-307EN
246
(2.2) When the tabletop is not in the horizontal position (motor-driven
movement)
While the tabletop forward movement button is held down, the tabletop
moves forward until it reaches the forward limit. While the tabletop backward
movement button is held down, the tabletop moves backward until it reaches
the backward limit.
<1> Press the tabletop lateral movement lock button of the tabletop operating
box and confirm that the button goes out.
<2> Hold down the tabletop operating knob of the tabletop operating box and
manually move the tabletop in the desired direction.
CAUTION: When rotating the tabletop of the catheterization table CAT-880B, pay
attention to the following points.
(a) Be sure not to touch the tabletop operating knob while the tabletop is
rotating. If the operating knob is pressed during tabletop rotation,
there is a risk of the tabletop moving in the longitudinal and/or lateral
directions while it is rotating.
(b) When the tabletop is rotated, the column base section is rotated
together with it. Be careful not to let your feet be caught between the
column base cover and the floor.
<1> Press the tabletop rotation brake release button of the tabletop operating box
and confirm that the button lights, indicating that the tabletop rotation brake
is released.
<2> Slowly rotate the tabletop. When the tabletop is at the 0° position, the
tabletop rotation center position display lights. To lock the tabletop at the
desired angle, rotate the tabletop to the desired angle and press the tabletop
rotation brake release button. Confirm that the button goes out, indicating
that the tabletop rotation brake is engaged.
Note that if tabletop rotation is not performed within 10 seconds after the
tabletop rotation brake release button is pressed, the tabletop rotation brake
is engaged automatically.
No. 2B308-307EN
247
(5) Tabletop longitudinal tilting
Tabletop longitudinal tilting is possible when the DP vascular system is
selected for the examination.
There are two tabletop longitudinal tilting modes: independent longitudinal
tilting mode and harmonic tilting mode.
NOTE: When the tabletop rotation brake is released, tabletop longitudinal tilting
cannot be performed. Before performing tilting, confirm that tabletop rotation
is locked.
In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop is tilted while maintaining the position
of the ROI.
<1> Switch to harmonic tilting mode by pressing both the tabletop end up and
down buttons at the same time and holding them down for more than one
second.
<2> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.
<3> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:
• Tabletop end up : Press the tabletop end up button.
• Tabletop end down : Press the tabletop end down button.
NOTICE: In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop is moved longitudinally and vertically
when longitudinal tilting is performed. Be careful to avoid contact between
the tabletop and peripheral equipment.
No. 2B308-307EN
248
NOTE: 1. To exit harmonic tilting mode, press both the tabletop end up and down
buttons at the same time and hold them down for more than one second.
2. In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop tilt reset button on the operating box
blinks.
3. When the arm of the support unit is not positioned near the tabletop (i.e.,
only the catheterization table is in use), the axis of rotation for harmonic
tilting mode is set to a position 30 cm from the end of the tabletop. To
change the position of the axis of rotation, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
NOTE: 1. When the tabletop rotation brake is released, tabletop tilting cannot be
performed. Before performing tilting, confirm that tabletop rotation is locked.
<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.
<2> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:
NOTE: When either the longitudinal or lateral angle is not 0°, the tabletop tilt reset
button on the table operating box lights. When both angles are 0°, the reset
button goes out.
<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.
<2> While holding down the release button, hold down the reset button until the
tabletop returns to the horizontal position. When the tabletop is in the
horizontal position, the reset button goes out.
No. 2B308-307EN
249
9.3 Auto-Positioning
Up to 64 radiographic and fluoroscopic positions can be stored and
reproduced.
*1) For systems with the CAT-880B used in combination, the tabletop lateral tilt
angle and tabletop longitudinal tilt angle can also be stored.
This method, which is the default setting, reproduces the stored system
positions.
No. 2B308-307EN
250
(3) Conditions and restrictions for auto-positioning
Auto-positioning operation is restricted depending on the system status and
the support unit position.
(b) For DP systems in the 0° or 90° layout, the support unit of the unselected
system is not in the retracted position.
(c) For the DP vascular system, the C-arm support column rotation angle is not
within the range of ±60°. However, it is possible to store the position when
the C-arm support column rotation angle is +90° or -90°.
(d) For DP systems in the 0° or 90° layout, the support unit of the unselected
system is not in the retracted position.
NOTE: For DP systems, auto-positioning can be performed for the selected system
(DP cardiac system or DP vascular system). For example, if DP cardiac
system has been selected, auto-positioning can be performed for the DP
cardiac system.
No. 2B308-307EN
251
(4) Auto-positioning No.
The positions can be stored by setting positioning Nos. and can be
reproduced by specifying desired auto-positioning Nos. The positions
corresponding to some positioning Nos. are fixed and cannot be changed.
2. Stored positions can be registered for each study protocol. Create the study
protocol in Utility mode, start the dummy study, and store the positions.
No. 2B308-307EN
252
(5) Storing a position
<1> Set the support unit and catheterization table to the position to be stored.
For the positions that can be stored, refer to (1) "Positions that can be
stored".
For position Nos. 0 to 7, enter "0" first. For example, enter "0" and "3" to
enter position 3.
Positioning No. <4> The entered positioning No. and the position corresponding to the No. are
displayed in the image display area of the fluoroscopic monitor for 5 s.
Check whether the settings can be overwritten.
<5> To set the position data, press the last digit of the entered auto-positioning
No. for 2 seconds or more. A confirmation sound is generated and the
position data is stored.
No. 2B308-307EN
253
(6) Reproducing the desired position
<1> Move all the peripheral units out of the operating range of the support unit
and the catheterization table.
Positioning No. <2> Enter the positioning No. with which the position to be reproduced is
managed. For the procedure for entering the positioning No., refer to steps
<2> and <3> of in (5) "Storing a position".
<3> The entered positioning No. and the position managed by the No. are
displayed in the Image display area of the fluoroscopic monitor. Confirm that
the displayed information is correct. To cancel reproduction, hold down any
of the Auto-positioning setting buttons for at least 2 seconds or leave the
buttons untouched for at least 5 seconds.
Pull and hold the arm/tabletop operation start lever until the system moves to
the position to be reproduced. A confirmation sound is generated when the
Positioning data display system is at the correct position. The position can also be recalled by
pressing the Auto-positioning start button.
No. 2B308-307EN
254
CAUTION: In systems that use the catheterization table CAT-880B, if the
catheterization table is tilted while a position is being reproduced,
interference may occur between the catheterization table and the
support unit. Operate the system extremely carefully.
3. The magnification ratio for live zoom at the time the position was registered
is reproduced.
No. 2B308-307EN
255
9.4 Auto-Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions
The radiographic angle (RAO/LAO/CRA/CAU angle) and SID of the acquired
images are reproduced by the support unit (auto-angle). In addition,
acquired images at the closest angle to the current radiographic angle can
be replayed on the monitor (auto-mapping).
Note that to use the auto-mapping function, it must be assigned to one of the
Function buttons. For details, refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions
Using Function Buttons" of the reference manual.
<4> If the monitor selection menu is displayed on the reference monitor, use the
monitor selection menu to select the monitor on which the image to be used
for the Auto Angle function is displayed.
Monitor selection menu
Radiographic angle <5> The radiographic angle to be reproduced is displayed on the monitor. Check
display the angle.
<6> Pull the Arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the
auto-positioning start button until the radiographic angle to be reproduced is
set. A confirmation sound is generated when the system is at the correct
position.
CAUTION: Before attempting to reproduce the auto-angle, make sure that the
support unit arm is set to a position where radiography can be
performed.
Movement for reproducing the angle is started at the current position,
even if the arm is away from the patient, and contact with persons or
peripheral units may result.
No. 2B308-307EN
256
NOTE: 1. To interrupt auto-mapping, release the Arm/tabletop operation start lever or
the auto-positioning start button. To restart auto-mapping, pull and hold the
Arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning start
button within 5 s after the interruption.
Auto-mapping is resumed from the position where it was interrupted.
6. If the C-arm support unit is not at the set position (support column rotation
angle 0°), the radiographic position cannot be reproduced.
7. The positions that can be reproduced using the auto-angle function can be
changed.
To change the settings, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.
At the time of shipment from the factory, the LAO/RAO, CRA/CAU, SID, and
FOV have been registered as positions that can be reproduced.
No. 2B308-307EN
257
NOTE: 10. In systems supporting 3D reconstruction (*1), auto-angling using 3D
reconstruction images is possible (the viewing angle of the 3D reconstruction
image is reproduced by the support unit).
(2) Click the [3D Auto Angle] button in the menu on the reference monitor.
(3) The display angle of the 3D reconstruction image is displayed on the monitor
as the radiographic angle to be reproduced. Confirm the displayed value.
(4) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning
start button until reproduction of the radiographic angle is completed. A
confirmation sound is generated when position reproduction is completed.
• Past image
• Image acquired using a system other than Alphenix
No. 2B308-307EN
258
NOTE: 13. In Alphenix systems combined with the 3D roadmap kit (XIDF-3DP802/C1),
the Path Direction function and Path Navigation function of the 3D roadmap
application can be selected and executed on the system using the procedure
below. Refer to the operation manual for the 3D roadmap kit for details of
the Path Direction function and Path Navigation function.
(1) Draw a path line on the MPR image and click the [3DRM On/Off] button.
Refer to the operation manual for the 3D roadmap kit for details of the
operating procedure.
(2) Click the [Path Direction] button in the menu on the reference monitor. The
3D reconstruction image corresponding to the path line as viewed directly
from the top is displayed on the monitor.
(3) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console. It is not
necessary to select [3D Auto Angle].
The arm of the support unit moves to the position where the path line is
viewed from the input (puncture) direction.
(4) Start fluoroscopy and confirm the path line input (puncture) position.
(5) Click the [Path Navigation] button in the menu on the reference monitor. The
3D reconstruction image corresponding to the path line as viewed directly
from the side is displayed on the monitor.
(6) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console. It is not
necessary to select [3D Auto Angle].
The arm of the support unit moves to the position where the path line is
viewed from the input (puncture) direction.
(7) Repeat steps (2) to (6) as many times as required to confirm the position,
angle, and depth of the device.
No. 2B308-307EN
259
(2) Replaying the image closest to the current radiographic
angle (auto-mapping function)
Among the acquired images, the image with the closest radiographic angle
to the current radiographic angle (RAO/LAO/CRA/CAU angle) is retrieved
and displayed on the reference monitor.
<1> Press the Auto-mapping image button of the Function buttons or the
Auto Map button (the Tool tab) in Exam mode on the system monitor.
The retrieved image is displayed on the reference monitor.
NOTE: 1. If the Auto-mapping image button is pressed again before changing the
radiographic angle, the image with the second closest radiographic angle to
the current radiographic angle is displayed.
2. If there are several images acquired with the same angle, the latest image is
displayed. Each time the Auto-mapping image button is pressed, the image
will be switched to the next most-recent image.
3. The permissible range for radiographic angle retrieval can be set. The
default setting is ±5°.
If this setting needs to be changed, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
260
9.5 Switching the System (DP System)
This subsection describes the procedures for switching to the DP cardiac
system or the DP vascular system.
NOTE: 1. Since the study protocol has been set for each system (DP cardiac system,
DP vascular system), if the system is switched, the study protocol is also
switched.
If the system is switched during examination, the study is started with the
switched study protocol.
2. If Start Study is performed while the system is being switched, the study may
not be started properly. In this case, wait until switching of the system is
completed and then perform Start Study.
(1) Preparation
Terminate the following processing before switching the system.
No. 2B308-307EN
261
(2) 0° layout system
The position of the CAS-810A/A2 determines which system can be used.
NOTICE: When the catheterization table CAT-880B is used in combination, set the
tabletop longitudinal tilt angle and tabletop lateral tilt angle to 0° and then
switch the system. If system switching is attempted when the tabletop tilt
angles are not set to 0°, the support unit may interfere with the
catheterization table.
0° layout system
(e.g.: when the DP cardiac system is selected)
For the checking procedures, refer to subsection (4) "Checking the system".
<1> Move the CAS-810A/A2 to the retraction position (support column rotation
position: 135°/-90°).
<2> Move the CAS-830B/A1 to the position where the support unit is used.
For the checking procedures, refer to subsection (4) "Checking the system".
No. 2B308-307EN
262
NOTE: 1. For the support unit operating procedures, refer to subsection 9.1 "Operating
Procedures for the Support Unit".
2. Even when the DP vascular system has been selected, support column
rotation can be performed manually for the CAS-810A/A2.
3. Even when the DP cardiac system has been selected, the CAS-830B/A1 can
be operated using the Support column operation buttons on the CAS-
830B/A1. At this time, note that the interference warning function actuates; a
warning sound is generated and the movement speed is reduced. For the
operating procedure for the Support column operation buttons, refer to
subsection 4.7.2 (2) "Support column operation buttons".
5. Even when the DP vascular system has been selected, if the CAS-830B/A1
is moved to the retraction position, the X-ray exposure disable function is
automatically actuated and X-ray exposure is also disabled for the
CAS-830B/A1.
By releasing the X-ray exposure disable function, X-ray exposure is enabled
for the CAS-830B/A1. For details, refer to subsection 5.10 "Disabling X-ray
Exposure".
No. 2B308-307EN
263
(3) 90° layout system
Rotate the tabletop of the catheterization table to the 0°/90° positions and
switch to the support unit to be used.
<1> Set the tabletop rotation angle of the catheterization table to 90°.
For the checking procedures, refer to subsection (4) "Checking the system".
<1> Set the tabletop rotation angle of the catheterization table to 0°.
For the checking procedures, refer to subsection (4) "Checking the system".
NOTE: 1. For the procedures for rotating the catheterization table tabletop, refer to
subsection 9.2 "Operating Procedures for the Catheterization Table".
No. 2B308-307EN
264
(4) Checking the system
Before operating the system or after switching the system, be sure to check
which system is selected.
This can be checked using the status indicator displayed on the system
console/fluoroscopic monitor or the ready lamp on the support unit.
2. If the ready lamp blinks while operating the system, check which system is
selected as displayed on the status indicator.
3. If the status indicator and the ready lamp indicate different systems due to a
system abnormality etc., visually check the system and the ready lamp.
4. If after checking the system it has not been switched to the selected system,
return the system to the previous system and select the desired system
again. If the system is still not switched, something may be preventing the
X-ray tube from being changed.
In this case, switch the X-ray tube assembly referring to subsection 5.8
"System Reset".
No. 2B308-307EN
265
9.6 Operating the Large Screen Monitor (Option)
The large screen monitor allows multiple images to be displayed at the same
time. The display layout can be changed according to the type of
examination (diagnosis, interventional procedure, etc.).
Turn ON the power of the Alphenix system. The power of the large screen
monitor is turned ON.
Turn OFF the power of the Alphenix system. The power of the large screen
monitor is turned OFF.
2. It is possible to select the display layout using the system console, tableside
console, main console, or satellite console. For details, refer to the
reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
266
9.7 Operating the Tablet Console (Option)
9.7.1 Details of the tablet console
When a tablet console is used in combination, the following operations can
be performed in the examination room.
No. 2B308-307EN
267
(3) Switch box
The switch box includes some of the functions of the tableside console.
The switch box may not be included in some configurations of the system.
CAUTION: Do not press the menu selection button without starting a study ("Start
Study") unless an emergency study is to be performed. The system
enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.
NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu selection
button. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") from the Examination Room". A study should be started
using the menu selection button only in an emergency.
No. 2B308-307EN
268
(4) Touch panel console (tablet console)
No. 2B308-307EN
269
9.7.2 Starting up the tablet console
NOTE: 1. When the power of the Alphenix system is turned ON, if the tablet console
does not turn ON automatically, hold down the power button on the tablet
console for 4 seconds or longer.
2. When the power of the Alphenix system is turned OFF, if the tablet console
does not turn OFF automatically, follow the procedure below to turn OFF the
tablet console.
No. 2B308-307EN
270
NOTE: 2. When the following screen is displayed, tap the [Shutdown] button.
To cancel shutdown and return to the previous screen, tap the [Cancel]
button.
No. 2B308-307EN
271
(2) Startup
When the tablet console has started up, the startup screen is displayed.
Select the target category from the startup screen to display the workflow
screen.
If the study protocols and the category are linked, starting a study (Start
Study) automatically displays the workflow screen for the category linked to
the selected study protocol.
No. 2B308-307EN
272
(3) Home function
Tap the Home button to switch the current screen to the startup screen.
If the power of the tablet console does not turn OFF automatically when the
power of the Alphenix system is turned OFF or if it is necessary to select a
category, return to the startup screen. For the procedure for operating the
tablet console, refer to steps (1) and (2).
No. 2B308-307EN
273
9.7.3 Function selection on the tablet console
The functions of the tablet console can be selected using three methods.
For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions below.
No. 2B308-307EN
274
(2) Selection using the [Function] tab
All of the functions (selection buttons) are registered in the [Function] tab
and categorized in the tabs displayed on the left of the screen.
NOTE: Functions can be grouped into specific categories in each tab. When
multiple categories have been registered, touch the desired button as shown
below to switch pages.
No. 2B308-307EN
275
(3) Selection using the [Favorites] tab
The target function can be selected from the [Favorites] tab, in which
frequently used functions can be registered. For the procedures for
registering functions in the [Favorites] tab, refer to the following NOTE.
(a) Open the [Favorites] tab and long-press the selection button of the function
to be deleted from the [Favorites] tab.
(b) The recycle bin icon is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
Drag and drop the selected function (selection button) into the recycle bin.
Functions that are deleted from the [Favorites] tab are not deleted from their
original tabs.
No. 2B308-307EN
276
(4) Displaying BP images simultaneously (BP link)
BP images (pairs consisting of a frontal image and a lateral image) acquired
using a biplane system can be displayed simultaneously on the monitor with
a single touch. Photo images and map images can be displayed using the
BP link function.
<1> Tap the [Work Flow] tab, [Function] tab, or [Favorites] tab and then select
one of the functions (selection buttons) below.
<2> On the displayed screen, select the monitor for displaying the BP images.
<3> Confirm that [BP Link] is enabled. If it is disabled, tap [BP Link] to enable it.
No. 2B308-307EN
277
9.7.4 Tool dialog
The following functions can be selected from the tool dialog. For details,
refer to the corresponding descriptions below.
No. 2B308-307EN
278
(1) Selecting an auto-positioning No.
An auto-positioning No. used to specify a reproduction position (auto-
positioning function) can be selected using the tablet console.
It is also possible to register new support unit positions or to specify a
reproduction angle of the support unit.
<1> Tap .
No. 2B308-307EN
279
<2> Perform the following operations according to the objective.
For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions below.
Function Details
Selecting a An auto-positioning No. can be selected using either of the
reproduction position following two methods: by selecting a registered reproduction
position from among the graphics or by specifying an auto-
positioning No.
Refer to [Selecting a reproduction position from among the
graphics] and [Selecting a reproduction position by specifying an
auto-positioning No.].
Registering the current Saves the current position and overwrites the previously registered
position auto-positioning reproduction position. The current position is
overwritten using either of the following two methods: by selecting a
registered reproduction position from among the graphics or by
specifying an auto-positioning No.
Refer to [Registering a position by selecting a graphic to overwrite
the current position] and [Registering a position by specifying an
auto-positioning No. to overwrite the current position].
No. 2B308-307EN
280
[Selecting a reproduction position by specifying an auto-positioning
No.]
NOTICE: After an auto-positioning No. has been selected, do not tap the [Store]
button. Doing so causes the current position to be overwritten by the
reproduction position registered for the selected auto-positioning No.
No. 2B308-307EN
281
[Registering a position by selecting a graphic to overwrite the current
position]
This function is used to save the current system position and overwrite the
previously registered auto-positioning reproduction position. Tap the target
graphic to select the registered reproduction position to be overwritten. Then
set the system to the desired position to be registered and perform the
following procedure.
No. 2B308-307EN
282
[Registering a position by specifying an auto-positioning No. to
overwrite the current position]
This function is used to save the current system position and overwrite the
previously registered auto-positioning reproduction position. Specify the
auto-positioning No. for the target registered reproduction position. Then set
the system to the desired position to be registered and perform the following
procedure.
No. 2B308-307EN
283
[Specifying a reproduction angle of the support unit]
NOTE: The figures above show the operation screen for a biplane system.
For a single-plane system, the settings for are not displayed.
No. 2B308-307EN
284
<6> Start movement to the position to be reproduced.
Hold down the Auto-positioning start button until the system moves to the
position to be reproduced. A confirmation sound is generated when the
system is at the correct position.
2. To set the support unit to the reference position (LAO/RAO 0°, CRA/CAU
0°), perform the following procedures.
3. The arm position can be reproduced using the auto-positioning start button
or the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console.
No. 2B308-307EN
285
(2) Selecting a study protocol / acquisition program
A study protocol and acquisition program can be selected using the tablet
console.
<1> Tap .
<2> To select a study protocol, open the [Protocol] tab. To select an acquisition
program, open the [Program] tab.
<3> On the "Protocol List" screen, select the study protocol to be edited.
No. 2B308-307EN
286
<4> Select the target acquisition program by performing the following procedures.
<1> Tap .
No. 2B308-307EN
287
<3> Image grayscale adjustment and panning operations can also be performed
using the tablet console.
NOTE: 1. When the screen shown in step <2> is displayed, touching the screen with
two fingers (or if a single finger is already on the screen, tapping the screen
with another finger) switches the current screen to the screen shown in
step <3> for grayscale adjustment or panning. To return to the screen
shown in step <2>, remove your fingers from the screen.
(a) Tap displayed at the upper left corner of the operating panel screen.
A keyboard is displayed on the operating panel screen.
(b) Tap the keys on the keyboard displayed on the operating panel screen to
enter text.
(c) The AWS applications can be switched using the function keys (F1 to F11)
on the displayed keyboard.
No. 2B308-307EN
288
(3.2) Selecting a function using function selection buttons
<2> From the displayed list, tap the function selection button with which the
target function is to be executed.
If a shortcut key has been assigned, the desired function can be selected
using the shortcut key.
NOTE: To set shortcut keys, refer to the reference manual. Up to three shortcut
keys can be assigned to each AWS application.
No. 2B308-307EN
289
(4) Selecting the large-screen monitor layout
The display layout of the large-screen monitor can be selected using the
tablet console.
It is also possible to select a display layout preset in the system.
NOTE: When a biplane system is used, the location of the F-Live monitor (which
displays a live image of the frontal plane) is fixed and cannot be changed.
<4> To select a preset layout, click [Monitor Layout] and select the layout on the
displayed screen.
<6> To edit the monitor selected from the preset layout, click [Edit]. On the
displayed screen, edit the monitor (refer to the procedures in steps <2> and
<3>).
NOTE: Editing the display monitor as shown in step <6> is only temporary. The
preset display layout cannot be overwritten.
No. 2B308-307EN
290
(5) Performing image operations
Switching, playback, and pause of dynamic images and map images can be
performed using the tablet console.
NOTE: Dynamic image and map image operations can be performed in the same
manner as turning the pages of a book. Refer to (6) "Performing image
operations using touch gestures".
<2> Perform image operations. The functions of the image operation buttons are
as follows.
No. 2B308-307EN
291
(6) Performing image operations using touch gestures
Dynamic image and map image operations can be performed in the same
manner as turning the pages of a book.
<2> Perform dynamic image and map image operations using the displayed
screen shown below.
• Dynamic image Tap the operating panel screen with a single finger.
playback Each time the screen is tapped, dynamic image playback starts or is paused.
• Frame reverse feeding/ Touch the operating panel with a single finger and then swipe up or down.
frame feeding Up: frame reverse feeding, Down: frame forward feeding
• Dynamic image Touch the operating panel with a single finger and then swipe left or right.
switching Left: switching to the previous image, Right: switching to the next image
• Map image switching Touch the operating panel with two fingers and then swipe left or right.
Left: switching to the previous image, Right: switching to the next image
• Current monitor Tap the operating panel with three fingers.
switching Each time the screen is tapped, the current monitor is switched between the
fluoroscopic monitor and the reference monitor.
<3> To terminate this image operation, swipe in the lower part of the
screen to the upper edge of the operating panel.
No. 2B308-307EN
292
10. Study Appointment
Study appointment is made in Patient mode before starting the study.
Operation concerning start and finish of the study is also performed in this
mode.
No. 2B308-307EN
293
10.1 Patient Mode Selection
<1> Click the Patient tab and select Patient mode.
The study list is displayed here. Select the corresponding study in this list. It
is possible to specify the search conditions and search the corresponding
patients.
A mark displayed next to the list indicates the status of the study.
Study is completed.
Study is in progress.
Patient information and study information are entered at the time of study
appointment.
No. 2B308-307EN
294
10.2 Appointment for a New Study
A study appointment is made for a new patient.
<1> Enter the patient information and the study information in the Patient Info
tab. Enter the information in the Other Info tab, as required.
NOTE: 1. This system identifies the patient based on 4 items: Patient Name, Sex, Date
of Birth, and Patient ID.
The Patient ID can be used to identify the desired patient even if several
patients have the same Patient Name, Sex, and Date of Birth.
If the entered patient ID is the same as an existing patient ID, the
appointment is handled as appointment information for the existing patient,
and the 4 items become identical to those of the existing patient.
3. It is possible to change the input items for the patient information. For
details, see the reference manual.
4. Study Date can be selected using the calendar displayed by clicking the
button next to the Study Date input area.
No. 2B308-307EN
295
10.3 Start Study
(1) Selecting the scheduled study
<1> Select "Scheduled Studies" in the Study Status list box.
<2> Click the target study in the study list display area.
No. 2B308-307EN
296
CAUTION: Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming a study
when several hours has elapsed after the system power was turned
OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait at least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning ON
the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear before starting the study.
No. 2B308-307EN
297
10.4 Finish Study
When a study is completed, be sure to perform the study completion process
(Finish Study). If this process is not performed, the next study cannot be
started.
<1> Confirm that the patient has left the examination room.
No. 2B308-307EN
298
NOTE: 1. The acquired data sets are transferred to Review mode automatically when
Finish Study is executed (*1).
*1) It is possible to change the setting of not transferring the acquired datasets
automatically. If it is desired to change the setting, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
2. The study protocols can be configured so that the following functions are
executed automatically when Finish Study operation is performed. Refer to
the reference manual for the detailed procedure.
These functions are not executed if the system power is turned OFF without
performing Finish Study operation or if a study is started using the urgent
case function. In such cases, perform archiving and transfer manually.
3. The map deletion confirmation message is displayed even when the map
image has already been saved.
4. When the system is set to transfer the data manually to the HIS/RIS server,
it is possible to display the MPPS dialog box automatically when Finish
Study operation is performed. For the setting procedure, see the reference
manual.
6. When the RDS transfer function is selected, the dose data can be
transferred to the specified server on termination of the examination. For
details, refer to subsection 10.11 "RDS Transfer / RDSR transfer".
No. 2B308-307EN
299
10.5 Urgent Patient Acceptance
If there is no time to enter the patient information during in emergencies or
other situations, an information ID is automatically issued by the system to
permit the study to be performed.
<2> Select the study protocol from the Study Protocol list box.
No. 2B308-307EN
300
NOTE: 1. The automatically issued ID for the urgent patient includes the following
items.
No. 2B308-307EN
301
10.5.2 Simplified registration
When registering an urgent patient, select the preset study protocol. This
completes patient acceptance and starts the study automatically.
<1> Issue the urgent patient ID. Click the Entrance button.
<2> Select the study protocol. Click the appropriate Emergency button to which
the target study protocol is registered. The urgent patient ID is automatically
issued and the study is started with the selected study protocol. The Start
Study operation is not required.
NOTE: 1. To close the Entrance dialog box and return to the normal appointment
screen, click the Routine button.
2. For the registration procedure for the Emergency buttons, refer to section 8
"System Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual.
3. It is also possible to display the Entrance dialog box automatically when the
system is started. For the setting procedure, refer to section 8 "System
Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual.
4. If the patient status changes suddenly after "Finish Study" was executed,
"Start Study" can be executed from the tableside console in the examination
room. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") From the Examination Room".
No. 2B308-307EN
302
10.6 Repeat Study Appointment
When a repeat study is to be performed for a patient who has a study history,
a repeat study appointment can be made using the patient's study history.
<2> Select the period for search in the Display Range list box. The studies
performed in the specified period are displayed in the study list display area.
<3> Select the desired study in the study list. The selected study information is
displayed in the study/patient information input area.
No. 2B308-307EN
303
10.6.2 Keyword search
The search conditions, such as the patient name and the study date, are
specified and then the studies are searched.
<2> In the displayed Search dialog box, enter the search conditions.
(a) Select the study status in the Study Status list box.
All Studies
Completed Studies
Scheduled Studies (Not yet performed)
(b) Specify the search conditions in the search condition input area.
Check the desired search item checkbox and select or enter the search
conditions. To delete the entered search conditions, click the Clear button.
<3> Start searching. Click the Search button. The search results are displayed
in the search result display area.
<4> Click the desired study in the search results. The patient information or the
study information for the selected study is displayed in the Patient tab.
No. 2B308-307EN
304
NOTE: When the system is connected to an HIS/RIS, the data in the HIS/RIS server
is also searched. Note that search cannot be cancelled while data in the
HIS/RIS server is being searched.
<1> Change the patient information or the study information displayed in the
study/patient information input area as required.
NOTE: When making an appointment for a new study using Completed Study
information, the study information is not displayed in the following items.
These items should be entered.
• Accession No.
• Study Time
No. 2B308-307EN
305
10.7 Image Link
If a past image is linked to the scheduled study, it can be reviewed during
study.
<1> Select the scheduled study to which the past image is linked in the study list
display area.
<2> Click the Prev. Study button. The Prev. Study dialog box is displayed.
<3> Select the storage location in which the image to be linked is saved by
switching the tab in the Prev. Study dialog box.
<4> In the study list display area of the dialog box, select the study in which the
image to be linked is contained. The image information is displayed in the
image list display area.
<5> To display the image information as a list, click the List button. To display
the image information as a thumbnail, click the Thumbnail button.
<6> In the image list display area, select the image to be linked. Multiple images
can be selected. To select all the images, click the Select All button.
No. 2B308-307EN
306
10.8 Correcting/Canceling the Appointment
The information for the scheduled study can be changed before starting the
study. It is also possible to cancel the study appointment. For the procedure
for correcting or canceling the patient information after study is completed,
refer to section 5 "Image File Management" of the reference manual.
NOTE: 1. Clicking the Register button without overwriting causes the study to be
registered as a different study.
No. 2B308-307EN
307
10.9 Data Retrieval From the HIS/RIS
When an HIS/RIS is used, the study information or patient information
registered as an angiography study in the HIS/RIS server can be used.
<2> Select the appropriate option in the Modality and System selection field in
the Get Worklist dialog box and click the OK button.
No. 2B308-307EN
308
10.10 Transferring the Data to the HIS/RIS
When an HIS/RIS is used, various types of information concerning the study
can be transferred to the HIS/RIS server.
<1> Click the MPPS button. The MPPS dialog box is displayed.
NOTE: It is possible to automatically open the MPPS dialog box when the study is
finished. For the setting procedure, see the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
309
10.11 RDS Transfer / RDSR Transfer
10.11.1 Automatic data transfer at the end of the examination
The dose data can be transferred to the specified server termination of the
examination (Finish Study).
<3> RDS transfer : Select the server for the transfer destination.
RDSR transfer : Confirm the server for the transfer destination.
<4> Click .
RDS transfer
RDSR transfer
No. 2B308-307EN
310
10.11.2 Data transfer during the examination
The dose data can be transferred to the specified server at the desired
timing during the examination.
No. 2B308-307EN
311
NOTE: 1. The data in Region Examined selected at the time of study appointment is
also transferred.
<4> Click or .
<5> The RDS dialog box opens. Transfer the data in the same manner as
above.
*1) The image of the dose information summary is created at the end of the
RUN image.
No. 2B308-307EN
312
11. Fluoroscopy/Radiography
(Acquisition Mode)
After the operation for starting the study (Start study) is performed, execute
study (fluoroscopy/radiography) in Acquisition mode. For the Start study
procedure, refer to section 10 "Study Appointment".
[Fluoroscopy]
This section describes the procedure for basic fluoroscopy. For the
fluoroscopic image recording and fluoroscopy roadmapping procedures, see
the reference manual.
[Radiography]
This section describes the procedure for digital angiography (DA), one-shot
radiography, and digital subtraction angiography (DSA). For the procedure
for other radiographic techniques, see the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
313
WARNING: 1. Before performing a study, tell the patient not to move unless
otherwise instructed. Also, pay attention to patient movement during
the study to ensure that the patient does not move.
If the patient moves during the study and the patient's hand or leg
protrudes from the tabletop of the catheterization table or comes into
contact with a moving section of the system, the patient's hand or leg
may get caught in the system.
3. Before performing a study, confirm that the images acquired during the
previous study are no longer displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor. If
the images are identified incorrectly, misdiagnosis will result.
The related information for the displayed image can be checked in the
Radiographic Sequence No. and Examination Date display fields of the
Image Related Information display area on the fluoroscopic monitor.
CAUTION: 1. Instruct the patient not to touch the operating switches or other
objects on the tabletop. In addition, confirm that the patient observes
these instructions during the examination.
• The patient immobilization band is not loose and holds the patient
firmly.
• The patient's shoulders are in contact with the shoulder rests.
• The patient's feet are in contact with the footrest.
No. 2B308-307EN
314
NOTICE: In the following cases, the radiography start timing may be delayed for
several seconds after the radiography switch is pressed.
3. When all the conditions below hold, it may not be possible to display the
edges of the field on the image due to X-ray tube assembly target angle
limitations. Please be aware of this.
The conditions differ depending on the FPD used.
It is possible to eliminate missing sections on images by setting the SID as
specified in the table below.
*2) Excluding rotational DSA, stepping DSA, and other programs that change
the radiographic angle or anatomical region during acquisition.
No. 2B308-307EN
315
11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode
<1> Click the Acquisition tab to select Acquisition mode.
Various settings for fluoroscopy and radiography are performed in this area.
No. 2B308-307EN
316
11.2 Selecting the Acquisition Program (Switching the Study
Protocol)
Before starting radiography, the acquisition program to be used for
radiography is selected from those registered in the study protocol selected
at the time of study appointment. In addition, the study protocol selected at
the time of patient appointment can be switched during studies.
<2> Click the Gr. tab to which the target acquisition program is registered.
<3> In the displayed acquisition program list, click the target acquisition program.
No. 2B308-307EN
317
11.2.2 Switching the study protocol
The study protocol selected at the time of patient appointment can be
switched during studies.
<2> Select the target acquisition program. For the selection procedure, refer to
subsection 11.2.1 "Selecting the acquisition program".
No. 2B308-307EN
318
11.3 Fluoroscopy
The basic procedure for fluoroscopy is described.
<2> Click the Switch to normal fluoroscopy button and confirm that the button
lights.
NOTE: The fluoroscopic conditions (kV, mA, ms) are set to those set in the study
protocol. For the procedure for checking and changing the conditions, refer
to subsection 11.3.2 "Detailed fluoroscopy settings".
No. 2B308-307EN
319
(2) Fluoroscopic X-ray generation
Fluoroscopic X-rays are generated while the fluoroscopy start button is held
down.
3. The desired fluoroscopic images can be saved. For details, refer to the
reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
320
(3) High Level Control (HLC) fluoroscopy
High Level Control (HLC) fluoroscopy can be selected by using the HLC
fluoroscopy start button.
WARNING: In HLC fluoroscopy, the maximum incident dose to the patient is higher
than the normal dose limitation. Do not use HLC fluoroscopy more
than necessary.
NOTE: 1. The procedure for selecting HLC mode is described in the locations specified
below. In HLC mode, use the fluoroscopy start button to start/terminate HLC
fluoroscopy.
Note that HLC mode cannot be selected in systems for the USA.
3. For the footswitch with function buttons, the HLC fluoroscopy start function
may not be assigned. For details, refer to subsection 4.8.1 (3) "Footswitch".
No. 2B308-307EN
321
11.3.2 Detailed fluoroscopy settings
The basic fluoroscopy setting procedure is described. For other settings,
refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing the Study Protocol/Acquisition Program" of
the reference manual.
<2> In the displayed Fluo X-ray dialog box, select the method for setting the
fluoroscopic conditions. This changes between auto and manual each time
the Fluoroscopic Conditions Switch button is clicked.
<3> When Manual is selected, set the fluoroscopic conditions in the Fluoroscopic
Conditions list box.
If "Auto" has been selected for the fluoroscopic mode, the FOV can be
switched between "Normal Focus" (standard FOV) and "HD Focus" (high-
resolution FOV). (The middle focus, the small focus, and the automatic
focus are available for "Normal Focus" and "HD Focus".) Note that "Auto"
may not be selectable depending on the combination of the FPD and X-ray
tube assembly used.
No. 2B308-307EN
322
NOTE: When the values for kV, mA, and ms are set in Manual mode, the
fluoroscopic conditions to be actually used in fluoroscopy are calculated by
the system based on these values. Therefore, confirm the final set values in
the common information display area of the fluoroscopic condition display
section on the system console.
(4) Maximum incident dose rate selection (except for the USA)
Select HLC mode to set the maximum patient incident dose rate to
175 mGy/min. Place a check mark in the HLC Selection check box.
NOTE: 1. The fluoroscopy mode can be changed using the function buttons. For
details, refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of
the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
323
(5) Confirming fluoroscopy mode
Click the Details button. The following information can be checked.
NOTE: 1. When the system is set so that the beam hardening filter is automatically
selected, "Auto" is displayed in the Beam Filter section. The filter that has
been selected automatically can be checked in the common information
display area. For details, refer to subsection 4.1.1 "Common information
display area".
2. The beam hardening filter used in combination can be checked. Click the
Additional Filter Info button on the Utility mode screen. The beam hardening
filter confirmation dialog is displayed.
No. 2B308-307EN
324
11.4 DA / One-Shot Radiography
A dynamic image is acquired in DA. The acquired image is automatically
stored in the RAID.
[Preparatory work]
No. 2B308-307EN
325
[Image acquisition procedure]
To acquire a still image, step on the function button to which the instant-shot
radiography function has been assigned.
No. 2B308-307EN
326
11.4.2 DA / one-shot radiography
NOTE: When DA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can easily enter
the detector, such as the lower extremities, it is recommended that [DT-DA]
(Dynamic Trace DA) be selected for the acquisition program. The effects of
direct X-rays are reduced, ensuring the appropriate dose (image level). In
addition, flattening processing for the image background is enhanced as
compared to that in normal image processing.
Do not select Dynamic Trace for a region in which the entry of direct X-rays
is not significant. Doing so may result in halation.
<2> Confirm the radiographic condition setting method. Either Auto or Manual
has already been assigned to the selected acquisition program. Confirm the
setting method in the display area shown below.
<3> When Manual is selected, set the radiographic conditions in Tube Voltage,
Tube Current, and Pulse Width list boxes.
No. 2B308-307EN
327
(3) Checking the contrast medium
When "Injector interlock" is selected, confirm that the contrast medium
injector is ready.
Press the fluoroscopy start button and perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or
more. The radiographic conditions are automatically calculated. For the
fluoroscopic procedures, refer to (2) "Fluoroscopic X-ray generation" of
subsection 11.3.1.
NOTE: If any of the following settings is changed after fluoroscopy, the X-ray
conditions must be set again. In this case, perform fluoroscopy again for at
least 2 seconds.
For DA, X-ray generation continues while the button is held down.
NOTE: 1. It is possible to start or finish radiography using the footswitch installed in the
examination room.
1. Hold down the radiography switch until the acquired images are played
CAUTION:
back on the monitor. If the switch is released before the images are
played back, the images may not be acquired and radiography must be
performed again.
No. 2B308-307EN
328
11.4.3 Detailed settings of DA / one-shot radiography
Various conditions preset to the selected acquisition program can be
changed before starting radiography. For settings other than those
described below, refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing the Study Protcol/
Acquisition Program" of the reference manual.
* This may not be selectable, depending on the X-ray tube assembly used in
combination.
NOTE: Reducing the maximum pulse width is an effective way to suppress image
blurring resulting from motion such as the heartbeat. However, when the
maximum pulse width is reduced, the desired level of image quality may not
be obtained due to a reduction in image contrast etc. The maximum pulse
width should be adjusted to an appropriate value.
No. 2B308-307EN
329
(4) Setting injector interlock
The timing of X-ray generation and contrast medium injection can be set for
DA.
<2> Select the delay time. X-ray exposure is started when the period after start
of contrast medium injection, set from the Delay Time spin box, has elapsed.
<2> Select the delay time: the ABC function is locked when the period after start
of radiography, set from the Delay Time spin box, has elapsed.
No. 2B308-307EN
330
(7) Other settings
In addition to the settings described above, the following settings can be
changed.
No. 2B308-307EN
331
11.5 Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA)
In DSA, subtraction is performed between images with and without contrast
medium to eliminate the non-vascular tissue and thus generate images
depicting only the blood vessels.
CAUTION: For images with significant differences in brightness level within the
FOV, insert the appropriate compensation filter to decrease the
differences in brightness level. For such images, halation cannot be
corrected by gain adjustment.
If gain adjustment is performed for such images, on the monitor it may
seem that the halation has been corrected. However, the displayed
image may differ significantly from the actual image.
3D-DSA and AlphaCT are used to acquire information for generating three-
dimensional images for the region of interest.
2. When DSA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can easily enter
the detector, such as the lower extremities, it is recommended that [DT-DSA]
(Dynamic Trace DSA) be selected for the acquisition program. The effects
of direct X-rays are reduced, ensuring the appropriate dose (image level).
In this case, the same image processing as in standard DSA is applied to the
image. When [DT-DSA] is selected, flattening processing for the image
background is enhanced as compared to that in normal image processing.
Do not select Dynamic Trace for a region in which the entry of direct X-rays
is not significant. Doing so may result in halation.
3. When the Realtime auto pixel shifting function (RAPS function) is selected,
misalignment between the contrast image and the mask image is corrected
automatically and the corrected images are saved during DSA acquisition. If
additional correction is required, perform pixel shifting for the saved images.
No. 2B308-307EN
332
NOTE: 4. When acquisition program [DT-DSA] (Dynamic Trace DSA) is selected, the
brightness of the region of interest can be changed in three levels. Select
the brightness level using the "Dynamic Trace Parameter" list box before
starting radiography (fluoroscopy). The differences between the parameters
are shown in the table below.
No. 2B308-307EN
333
11.5.1 DSA procedure
<2> Confirm that Injector interlock is selected to automatically inject the contrast
medium at the specified timing.
No. 2B308-307EN
334
(5) Starting radiography
Perform Test Shot to confirm that the radiographic conditions are appropriate.
(Check whether or not the halation level is appropriate.)
After confirmation, start radiography.
<1> Confirm that the Test Shot checkbox is checked. If not, place a check mark.
The Test Shot image is displayed on the monitor in the examination room.
<3> Check the degree of halation. The halation areas are displayed black.
<4> If halation correction is required, release the handswitch to stop test exposure
and correct halation, following the steps described below. If halation
correction is not necessary, proceed with step <5> to start radiography.
(a) Tilt the Menu operating lever toward/away from you to correct the halation.
(b) Press the top button of the Menu operating lever to set the corrected result.
<5> Start radiography. Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to the second
stage. Be sure to hold it down until image acquisition is completed.
CAUTION: Keep the X-ray exposure handswitch ON until the Test Shot image is
played back on the monitor in the examination room. Otherwise, X-ray
exposure is interrupted and Test Shot may need to be performed again.
No. 2B308-307EN
335
NOTE: 1. When the specified number of images are acquired, radiography for the next
stage is started automatically with the corresponding acquisition conditions.
When the radiography for the last stage is complete, radiography is
terminated automatically.
2. Test Shot can be omitted, but images may be acquired with darker
conditions than expected. Check the images in advance with Test Shot to
acquire better-quality images.
4. Radiography can be started and terminated using the Exposure Start button
of the footswitch in the control room. If test exposure is performed using the
footswitch and halation correction is then found to be necessary,
immediately stop exposure. If the footswitch is kept pressed, the system
proceeds to the next radiography step.
No. 2B308-307EN
336
11.5.2 Halation correction
If there is halation in the Test Shot image, one of the following two methods
can be used to reduce the halation: Quick correction or Correction with SEC
Hold.
CAUTION: The halation correction value calculated during gain adjustment must
be considered as the reference value. In addition, the Test Shot image
displayed in the halation area must be considered as the reference
image.
For images with significant differences in brightness level within the
FOV, halation cannot be corrected using the calculated correction
value. If gain adjustment is performed for such images, on the monitor
it may seem that the halation has been corrected. However, the actual
image is not corrected and may differ significantly. In order to prevent
this problem, insert the appropriate compensation filter to decrease the
differences in brightness level in such images.
<1> When halation is seen in the Test Shot image, release the first stage of the
X-ray exposure handswitch and perform gain adjustment as follows.
NOTE: 1. When thumbnail display is being performed on the reference monitor, the
gain cannot be adjusted even if the X-ray exposure handswitch is turned
OFF after Test Shot is completed.
In this case, perform the following steps to adjust the gain.
(1) Terminate the function currently being executed on the reference monitor.
(2) Select the monitor on which the Test Shot images are displayed. Each time
the Image processing target selection button on the main console is pressed,
selection is switched between the fluoroscopic monitor and the reference
monitor.
(3) Click the DSA Gain button in the menu display area of the reference monitor.
(4) Adjust the gain and apply the setting. Refer to <2> and <3> below.
2. When the DSA Gain button is selected in the menu display area of the
reference monitor, the menu display area gain value (%) is displayed.
If the gain needs to be increased, push the Menu operating lever away from
you.
If the gain needs to be reduced, pull the Menu operating lever toward you.
No. 2B308-307EN
337
<3> Set the gain.
After the gain is set, the system is set to the SEC HOLD status.
Check the halation again with a Test Shot image. If the halation is corrected,
hold down the second stage of the X-ray exposure handswitch and continue
DSA. If the halation still needs to be corrected, release the first stage of the
X-ray exposure handswitch and adjust the gain again.
NOTE: After halation correction, it is possible to omit Test Shot and start DSA
directly. However, if the halation correction is insufficient, images with an
appropriate brightness may not be obtained. Use Test Shot even after gain
adjustment to acquire better-quality images.
No. 2B308-307EN
338
11.5.3 SEC Hold
It is possible to perform DSA by setting the radiographic conditions manually.
NOTE: After setting the radiographic conditions, it is possible to omit Test Shot and
start DSA directly. However, images with an appropriate brightness may not
be obtained. Use Test Shot to acquire better-quality images.
<2> Change the conditions if required. The items below can be changed.
<3> Click the Set button after changing the gain on the Radiography tab.
NOTE: 1. Gain (%) is linked to the gain adjustment in the examination room.
Therefore, if the gain is corrected in the examination room, the SEC Hold
status should be set automatically.
3. Click the Hold button again to release the Manual setting for the radiographic
conditions and then select Auto again.
4. It is possible to preset whether the SEC Hold conditions are retained. If the
SEC Hold status is retained, the radiographic conditions are fixed but the
gain adjustment value is reset to 100%.
No. 2B308-307EN
339
11.5.4 Detailed settings for DSA
The conditions preset in the selected acquisition program can be changed
before image acquisition. For other settings, refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing
the Study Protocols/Acquisition Program" of the reference manual.
<2> Select one of the following two contrast medium injection timings.
Select Mask Delay. In this case, set the time between injecting the contrast
medium and starting mask image acquisition. Refer to <3> below.
<3> When Mask Delay is selected, set the time between injecting the contrast
medium and starting mask image acquisition.
No. 2B308-307EN
340
(2) Setting of the acquisition parameters for mask images and
contrast images
The acquisition rate (Rate), the number of images summed to obtain the
average (Add), the number of acquired frames (Frames), the acquisition time
(Time), and the delay time for the start of the next stage of mask
image/contrast image acquisition can be checked or set.
Four stages of contrast image acquisition can be set (Contrast1 to
Contrast4).
NOTE: 1. The number of stages that can be set is restricted according to the
conditions such as the set acquisition time, the number of acquired frames,
etc.
No. 2B308-307EN
341
NOTE: 3. When DSA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can enter the
detector, the image brightness may not be uniform in areas with and without
direct X-rays. If the image brightness is not uniform, it is advisable to acquire
a mask image and a contrast image using the same acquisition rate to
reduce brightness nonuniformity. It is also possible to reduce nonuniformity
by placing a compensation filter in the area where direct X-rays enter the
detector (even when different acquisition rates are used).
AEC ROI : The ROI used for adjusting the AEC can be set here.
No. 2B308-307EN
342
(5) Check and set the AEC dose (standard dose)
Set the standard detector incident dose per X-ray exposure.
<1> Select the parameter for Parametric Imaging. For details of the parameters,
refer to the operation manual for the XIDF-AWS801 (Parametric Imaging
functional volume).
<2> Click the [PI Auto Transfer] button to enable the automatic transfer function.
NOTE: 1. The automatic transfer function can be enabled using the [PI Auto Transfer]
button in the menu display area on the reference monitor. Note, however,
that the parameter for Parametric Imaging set at the time of automatic
transfer cannot be set in the menu display area.
No. 2B308-307EN
343
(7) Enabling the Realtime auto pixel shifting function
When the Realtime auto pixel shifting (RAPS) function is enabled, minor
misalignment between the contrast image and the mask image is corrected
automatically during DSA.
<1> Click the [Image Parameter] setting button in the [Details] dialog box.
NOTE: Depending on the positional relationship between the contrast image and the
mask image, misalignment may not be corrected.
No. 2B308-307EN
344
(8) Enabling the automatic mask creation function
This function is used to automatically create a mask image using peak
tracing. The created mask image is set as the mask image for the
fluoroscopy roadmap when DSA acquisition is completed.
To enable this function, click the [Image Parameter] setting button and place
a checkmark for "Make Mask" in the displayed Image Parameter dialog box.
NOTE: 1. The mask images created using the automatic mask creation function are
not saved as map images. When another mask image is selected, the
created mask image is lost.
2. When the automatic mask creation function is used, the mask images are
created using peak tracing. Therefore, the automatic mask creation function
should be disabled for CO2 contrast radiography.
No. 2B308-307EN
345
(9) Other settings
The following settings can also be changed.
<1> Click the Details button. The corresponding setting screen is displayed.
No. 2B308-307EN
346
11.6 Various Settings for Fluoroscopy and Radiography
The setting procedures for the following functions used in fluoroscopy or
radiography are described.
Select the View ID to be set in the View ID selection list box before starting
image acquisition.
No. 2B308-307EN
347
11.6.3 Setting the contrast medium name on images
It is possible to set the contrast medium name on stored fluoroscopic or
radiographic images as related information.
Select the contrast medium name to be set in the Contrast Medium Name
list box before starting image acquisition.
NOTE: 1. A View ID can be entered from the keyboard. Click the View ID selection list
box to enable editing and then enter the View ID in the list box using the
keyboard. After entry is completed, press the Enter key on the keyboard to
register the View ID.
2. Registered View IDs can be deleted during a study. To delete a View ID,
select the View ID from the View ID selection list box and then press the
Delete key or the Backspace key on the keyboard.
When the Enter key is pressed, the View ID is deleted.
4. The items to be included in the list can be preset in the acquisition program.
For setting procedures, refer to subsections 8.2.7 "Editing the contrast
medium name" and 8.2.23 "Editing the View ID lists" of the reference
manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
348
11.6.4 Stopwatch
The stopwatch function is provided for measuring time. In addition, a buzzer
sound can be generated at the set time using the timer function.
(1) Stopwatch
To start the timer : Click the Start button.
<3> Select the timer operating mode using the Timer radio buttons.
No. 2B308-307EN
349
11.6.5 Adjustment of gradation and spatial filter
Gradation (brightness and contrast) and the spatial filter of the images
displayed on the reference and fluoroscopic monitors can be adjusted.
<2> Set the gradation and spatial filter in the corresponding setting areas shown
below.
No. 2B308-307EN
350
11.6.6 LIH (Last Image Hold) selection
The LIH function allows the last frame of fluoroscopy to be automatically
played back immediately after fluoroscopy is completed. To enable the LIH
function, check the LIH checkbox.
NOTE: 1. It takes approximately 2 seconds for the LIH image to be displayed after
fluoroscopy is completed. If the next fluoroscopy is started during this
period, the LIH image being prepared for display is canceled.
4. The LIH image may disappear when an operation such as acquisition start or
image playback is performed. Display a new LIH image as required.
For the LIH image, X-ray exposure field setting (virtual collimation) and
compensation filter position setting (virtual filtering) are enabled.
Since fluoroscopy does not need to be performed during setting, the
exposure dose can be reduced.
If setting is performed with the LIH image displayed, the beam limiting device
blades and compensation filters are displayed as graphics.
6. Virtual position
For the virtual position using the LIH image, it is possible to confirm the
exposure field for the next fluoroscopy to be performed. While the LIH
image is displayed, the exposure range after the position of the support
system or catheterization table is moved is displayed as a frame in the LIH
image.
No. 2B308-307EN
351
NOTE: [Method for selecting the virtual position]
In the menu display area of the reference monitor, select the [Virtual Pos
ON] button while the LIH image is displayed. The button display changes to
"Virtual Pos OFF" and the virtual position is displayed on the LIH image.
The initial setting of the virtual position (ON or OFF) can be selected for each
study protocol or each acquisition program. For the setting procedures, refer
to subsection 11.6.9 "Function setting".
Select the [Virtual Pos OFF] button. The button display changes to "Virtual
Pos ON] and the virtual position display is canceled.
• The virtual position is not displayed if the exposure field after the support
system or the catheterization table is moved is outside the range of the LIH
image.
• The virtual position is not displayed if the arm angle for the support system is
tilted by 40° or more.
• If a tilting table is used in combination, the tilting angle of the tabletop is not
taken into consideration. The virtual position is displayed as tilt angle "0°"
even when the tabletop is tilted.
7. It is possible to display the selected ABC ROI or AEC ROI on the LIH image.
For the procedure, see the reference manual. Setting is made in the system
parameter setting for the study protocol in Utility mode.
8. When both LIH and MIH are selected, MIH is given priority over LIH, and as
a result the LIH images are not displayed. For details of MIH, refer to
subsection 11.6.7 "MIH Selection".
No. 2B308-307EN
352
11.6.7 MIH (Map Image Hold) selection
The selected map image can be set for the MIH image. Immediately after
fluoroscopy is completed, the display on the fluoroscopic monitor is switched
from the fluoroscopic image to the MIH image. This function is useful when
comparing the fluoroscopic image and the map image on the fluoroscopic
monitor.
Note that the map image is normally displayed on the reference monitor.
Therefore, both the fluoroscopic and reference monitors need to be viewed
when comparing the fluoroscopic and map images.
<2> Perform either of the following steps. The map image selected in step <1> is
set to the MIH image and displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor.
• Move the cursor on the selected map image and right-click the mouse. In
the displayed menu, select [MIH Select].
• In the reference monitor menu, select [MIH Select].
NOTE: 1. Virtual collimator, virtual filtering, or virtual position cannot be used on the
MIH image.
2. A single frame of a dynamic image can be set to the MIH image. Select the
dynamic image and display the desired frame as a still image. Then set the
still image to the MIH image by performing the step described above. The
selected frame is stored as a map image and set to the MIH image.
4. The MIH function cannot be used when the spot fluoroscopy function is
selected.
No. 2B308-307EN
353
11.6.8 Simultaneous display setting (simultaneous display during
fluoroscopy)
During fluoroscopy, the fluoroscopic image and the fluoroscopic roadmap
image or live zoom image can be displayed simultaneously.
NOTE: 1. For simultaneous display during fluoroscopy, the images specified in the
table below are displayed on the fluoroscopy monitor and the reference
monitor.
When fluoroscopy
During fluoroscopy
is completed
Fluoroscopy • Fluoroscopic roadmap LIH image
monitor image
• Live zoom image
Reference monitor • Fluoroscopic image Not displayed (*1)
No. 2B308-307EN
354
11.6.9 Function setting
The following functions set in the Function dialog box are described.
NOTE: Function setting can be performed for each study protocol. Open the
"Function" dialog box by performing the following procedures and then
perform the required setting.
No. 2B308-307EN
355
<2> Click .
<3> Change the settings. For details, refer to the following pages.
Select the appropriate size in the FOV list box. The image size is enlarged
or reduced depending on the selected size.
NOTE: The FOV size can also be changed from the main console or the tableside
console. Refer to subsections 4.2 "Main Console" and 4.3 "Tableside
Console".
No. 2B308-307EN
356
Adjustment of the ABC brightness
The ABC brightness can be adjusted if Auto Control is selected as a
fluoroscopic condition.
<1> Select the adjustment value in the ABC Brightness spin box.
Live zoom
The magnification ratio of the fluoroscopic images (including LIH images)
can be changed digitally.
<1> Select the magnification ratio in the live zoom list box.
The fluoroscopic images will be magnified accordingly.
NOTE: 1. If live zoom is selected, the X-ray beam limiting device moves in response to
magnification of the image.
2. Live zoom can also be selected using the corresponding function button.
Refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of the
reference manual for details.
Image inversion
The image displayed on the monitor can be laterally/vertically inversed.
<1> Select the image inversion direction using the image inversion selection
checkboxes.
No. 2B308-307EN
357
Switching the positions of the left and right compensation
filters
The positions of the left and right compensation filters can be switched.
<1> Select the positions of the left and right compensation filters using the
Compensation Filter Switch radio buttons.
<2> Click the VCR Selection check box to place a check in it.
<3> Select the types of images to be recorded from the list box.
NOTE: For details regarding the VCR connection or settings, contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative.
For the VCR operating procedures, read the operation manual provided with
the VCR.
No. 2B308-307EN
358
RDSR transfer
The dose data is transferred to the specified server when the [Transfer]
button is clicked. Refer to subsection 10.11 "RDS Transfer / RDSR Transfer"
for details.
<1> Select the time period for generating buzzer sound in the fluoroscopy timer
setting list box.
If the fluoroscopy timer buzzer sounds, press the function button to which the
fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is assigned. The buzzer stops and
the fluoroscopy timer is reset to 0.
The fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is assigned to the following
function button on the tableside console as the default setting.
No. 2B308-307EN
359
NOTE: 1. For systems to be shipped to the USA, the fluoroscopic time is fixed to
5 minutes for compliance with the HHS standards applicable from June 2006
onwards.
The fluoroscopy timer setting list box is therefore not provided and setting is
not possible.
2. When the system power is turned OFF forcibly during a study using the
Power OFF button and the system power is then restarted, the fluoroscopy
timer is set to 5 minutes automatically. If backup fluoroscopy is started in
this status, the fluoroscopy timer counts up starting from 0.
3. The fluoroscopy timer can be preset to the study protocol. For details, see
the reference manual.
4. If a function other than the fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is to be
assigned to the function button in the positioning operating section, it is
recommended that the function should be assigned to a function button in
the image operating section.
When the satellite console (option) is used in combination, it is also possible
to assign the function to a function button on the satellite console.
No. 2B308-307EN
360
(2) Patient position registration
The patient position at the time of examination is recorded as image-related
information.
<2> Click .
NOTE: For the procedures for checking and editing image-related information, refer
to the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
361
(3) Large-screen monitor layout selection (option)
When the optional large-screen monitor is used, the display layout of the
large-screen monitor can be changed using the [Function] dialog.
<2> Click .
NOTE: The large-screen monitor layout can also be selected in the menu display
area of the examination room monitor. Select the layout in the list displayed
by clicking [Layout]. It is also possible to change the layout using [<Layout]
or [Layout>]. For the menu operating procedures, refer to subsection 12.3
"Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and Selecting
Functions".
No. 2B308-307EN
362
11.7 FPD Calibration
This subsection describes the FPD calibration procedure.
For the FPD, artifacts may appear in images due to the effects of the internal
temperature etc. These artifacts can be eliminated by performing calibration.
<1> Select the FPD Calibration button in the menu display area on the reference
monitor.
Selection buttons for calibration (Fluoroscopy button, Radiography button, All
button) are displayed.
*1) The processing time may be longer than that indicated here depending on
the conditions.
No. 2B308-307EN
363
Menu display area
Reference monitor
NOTE: 1. For the function button selection procedure in the menu display area, refer to
subsection 12.3 "Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions".
No. 2B308-307EN
364
12. Image Playback
This section describes the procedure for playing back the acquired images.
No. 2B308-307EN
365
NOTE: 1. If the displayed image disappears during operation, switch to another image
and select the target image again.
3. The frame from which image playback of the acquired fluoroscopic image is
started can be specified. The frames before the specified frame are not
played back.
If the acquired fluoroscopic image is played back from the first frame, dark
images are played back for the first few frames. To skip these, specify a
playback start frame located after the dark frames in the sequence.
The playback start frame can be set in site setup in Utility mode. For details,
see the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
366
12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image
The procedure for selecting a map image (reference image) or dynamic
image to be played back is described here.
2. The dynamic image including the selected map image can be played back.
For the playback procedure, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function
Buttons" of the reference manual.
Double-click the top of the thumbnail display area, where "MAP" or "RUN" is
displayed, to switch between the display of map image thumbnails and
dynamic image thumbnails.
No. 2B308-307EN
367
(1.3) Selecting the desired image
For the procedure for playing back the selected dynamic image, refer to
subsection 12.2 "Dynamic Image Playback".
3. The display can be switched between the map image thumbnails and
dynamic image thumbnails using the corresponding function buttons (if these
functions have been assigned to function buttons). Press the function button
corresponding to the type of thumbnail to be displayed. Pressing the same
button again switches the display to the other type of thumbnail.
4. Each time the menu button assigned to the function button is pressed, the
display is cycled between the menu, dynamic image thumbnails, and map
image thumbnails, in that order.
5. Thumbnails can be selected using the menu operating lever. Move the lever
upward/downward to select the image and press the lever to set the
selection.
6. When two reference monitors are used, the monitor for image display can be
selected using one of the following methods.
• Select the desired thumbnail using the menu operating lever. When the
monitor selection buttons [Ref.1] [Ref.2] are displayed, select the desired
monitor using the lever. Press the lever to set the selection.
• Move the cursor to the target thumbnail using the mouse and press the right
mouse button. The monitor selection buttons [Ref.1] [Ref.2] are displayed.
Move the cursor to [Ref.1] or [Ref.2] as desired and press the right or left
mouse button.
• Move the cursor to [Ref.1] or [Ref.2] as desired and click it to select it. Then,
move the cursor to the desired thumbnail and double-click it.
No. 2B308-307EN
368
(2) Selecting images in catalog display mode
Multiple map images or dynamic images can be displayed on the reference
monitor in catalog display mode, and the image to be played back can be
selected.
<1> Switch from full screen display to catalog display using the following buttons
assigned to the function buttons.
<2> Select the image from the catalog using the menu operating lever on the
console. Press the lever to set the image.
No. 2B308-307EN
369
NOTE: In addition to image selection, the following operations can be performed
using the mouse.
Menu Function
Displays the selected image in fullscreen mode.
Full Screen
Displays the image on which the cursor is placed in fullscreen mode.
Home Displays the first page of the thumbnail display.
End Displays the last page of the thumbnail display.
Previous Page Displays the previous page of the thumbnail display.
No. 2B308-307EN
370
(3) Switching to the previous/next image
The image currently displayed full-screen on the monitor can be switched to
the previous image or next image.
Use the Dynamic image file selection button or the Map image file selection
button to switch the image (*1).
• To display the previous image : Press the - end of the button once.
• To display the next image : Press the + end of the button once.
[Dynamic image file *1) Switches are provided with the following consoles.
selection] • Main console
• Review console
No. 2B308-307EN
371
12.2 Dynamic Image Playback
The procedure for playing back the selected dynamic image is described.
No. 2B308-307EN
372
(2) Image playback from the review console (option)
It is possible to play back dynamic images using the review console (option).
If the shuttle is released, it automatically returns to the center position and
image playback is stopped. To continue image playback, hold the shuttle at
the playback position.
No. 2B308-307EN
373
(4) Image playback using the mouse
If dynamic images are displayed full-screen on the monitor, they can be
played back using the mouse. Move the cursor to the reference monitor or
fluoroscopy monitor and operate the mouse as described below.
Playback (*1) To play back images, double-click the left mouse button
when image playback is not being performed.
Stop Double-click the left mouse button during image
playback.
Frame feeding Rotate the mouse wheel backward while image
playback is paused.
Frame reverse feeding Rotate the mouse wheel forward while image playback
is paused.
*1) When the desired dynamic image is selected from the dynamic image
thumbnails by double-clicking it, the selected image is displayed full-screen,
and image playback starts automatically.
No. 2B308-307EN
374
12.3 Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions
This subsection describes the procedures for switching between menus on
the reference monitor and selecting the functions to be executed.
To switch to the HOME menu, move the Menu operating lever to left or right
and hold it there for more than one second.
<2> Press the Menu operating lever to execute the selected function.
Function button
selection
HOME
menu
NOTE: Menu and function buttons can be selected using the mouse.
No. 2B308-307EN
375
No. 2B308-307EN
376
13. Image Processing During a Study
(Exam Mode)
In Exam mode, it is possible to display an image that has already been
acquired during a study and to perform processing operations, including
distance measurement and annotation, on the displayed image. For details,
refer to section 4 "Image Processing During a Study" of the reference
manual.
Note that some image processing operations, such as gradation processing
(which changes the brightness and contrast of the image) and image
magnification, can be performed using the function buttons without switching
to Exam mode. For details, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function
Buttons" of the reference manual.
No. 2B308-307EN
377
No. 2B308-307EN
378
14. Image File Management
(Directory Mode)
Directory mode is used to archive fluoroscopic or radiographic image data
saved (exported) in the RAID to media or DICOM servers and to read
(import) the data saved on media or DICOM servers.
No. 2B308-307EN
379
No. 2B308-307EN
380
15. Image Processing After
Completion of a Study (Review
Mode)
Stored images can be manipulated after a study is completed. These
operations are performed in Review mode.
No. 2B308-307EN
381
No. 2B308-307EN
382
16. Printing (Printing Mode)
Printing is a function for printing hard copies of the acquired images. It
provides print-related operations, including changing image arrangements
and image deletion when creating virtual print images on the monitor, and
enables image data to be sent to an output device.
No. 2B308-307EN
383
No. 2B308-307EN
384
17. Moving and Storage
Contents 17.1 Moving
17.2 Storage
No. 2B308-307EN
385
17.1 Moving
If the unit is to be moved, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative. If the unit is moved by the user or by personnel not
designated by Canon Medical Systems, the unit may be damaged.
17.2 Storage
(1) Environmental conditions for storage
The environmental conditions in the room in which the unit is stored should
be as specified below:
NOTE: Storage of the X-ray tube assembly with liquid metal bearing (LM tube)
If the LM tube is used in combination, it is recommended that the LM tube be
stored at an ambient temperature of 18°C or higher. If it is stored at a
temperature lower than 18°C, the liquid metal will harden and must be
melted when the system is started up. The time required for melting the
liquid metal differs depending on the storage temperature. For example, if
the LM tube has been stored at 10°C, approximately 10 minutes is required
for melting the liquid metal.
In cases where melting must be performed, 6 minutes or more is required for
system startup.
No. 2B308-307EN
386
18. System Maintenance
In order to maintain the safety and performance of the system, maintenance
and inspection are necessary. Users are responsible for the maintenance
and inspection of the system after purchase.
No. 2B308-307EN
387
CAUTION: 1. If any abnormality is found as a result of checks, stop using the system
and contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for repair.
No. 2B308-307EN
388
18.1 Daily Checks
Checks before and after operation must be carried out by the user. For the
check procedures, refer to section 7 "Daily Checks".
The items with a mark in the S column of the following table are safety check
items.
No. 2B308-307EN
389
(1) CAS-810A
No. 2B308-307EN
390
Check point Check item Interval S
Detector near/away Checking the slide guide and travel rail 3 years
movement section Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking the drive belt 3 years
Checking the backlash between the rack and the 3 years
pinion gear
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the air vent of the cover 1 year
Checking the packing inside the cover 3 years
Checking the fan of the FPD cooling unit 1 year
Checking the coolant hose and joint clamp 1 year
Checking the duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years
Cleaning the lifter frame 3 years
Checking the roller screen 1 year
X-ray tube support section Checking the important securing sections 3 years
Checking the ready lamp 1 year
Checking the joint of the water-cooling hose 3 years
Checking the packing inside the cover 3 years
Safety function check Checking the touch sensors Every
inspection
Checking the override operation Every
inspection
Checking the Emergency stop switch operation Every
inspection
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section Every
inspection
Control box Checking for dust 1 year
Power-supply section Checking the line voltage 1 year
Checking the output voltages of the switching power 1 year
supply
Coolant circulator Checking the coolant hose for damage 3 years
Cleaning the air vent of the coolant circulator 1 year
Checking the coolant temperature and coolant Every
pressure in the coolant circulator inspection
Checking the amount of coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking the quality of the coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking for coolant leakage in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
No. 2B308-307EN
391
(2) CAS-830B
No. 2B308-307EN
392
Check point Check item Interval S
Detector near/away Checking the slide guide and travel rail 3 years
movement section Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking the drive belt 3 years
Checking the backlash between the rack and the 3 years
pinion gear
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years
Checking the lifter frame 3 years
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the roller screen 1 year
Detector rotation section Checking the limit switch 3 years
Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking the drive V belt 3 years
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the timing belt 3 years
Checking the coolant hose and joint clamp of the 3 years
rotation section
Checking the important securing sections 3 years
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the detector section (rear of the FPD input 3 years
screen)
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section Every
inspection
Checking the V belt pulley setscrews and cover 3 years
securing screws
X-ray tube support section Checking the joint of the water-cooling hose 3 years
Checking the important securing sections 3 years
Checking the safety Checking the touch sensors Every
functions inspection
Checking the override operation Every
inspection
Checking the Emergency stop switch operation Every
inspection
Control box Checking for dust 1 year
Power-supply section Checking the line voltage 1 year
Checking the output voltages of the switching power 1 year
supply
No. 2B308-307EN
393
Check point Check item Interval S
Coolant circulator Checking the coolant hose for damage 3 years
Cleaning the air vent of the coolant circulator 1 year
Checking the coolant temperature and coolant Every
pressure in the coolant circulator inspection
Checking the amount of coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking the quality of the coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking for coolant leakage in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
*1) Also check this item at the time of operational check of the support unit using
the console.
No. 2B308-307EN
394
(4) CAT-850B
No. 2B308-307EN
395
(5) CAT-880B
No. 2B308-307EN
396
(6) DFP-8000C/A2
No. 2B308-307EN
397
(7) XTP-8100XG
No. 2B308-307EN
398
(8) MSF-04A, MSF-06A, MSF-56A
No. 2B308-307EN
399
(9) Entire system
No. 2B308-307EN
400
18.3 Periodically Replaced Parts
In order to maintain the safety, specifications, and performance of the
product, periodic replacement is required for some parts even within the
rated service life of the system.
<1> CAS-810A
Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Battery 3 years Control box A01-PWB
Touch sensor 5 years For the detector
Roll screen 3 years Detector near/away movement section
<2> CAS-830B
Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Battery 3 years Control box A01-PWB
Touch sensor 5 years For the detector
Fuse 1 year 0.5 A (time lag) inverter unit F1 to F6
Roll screen 3 years Detector near/away movement section
Microswitches 3 years Detector near/away movement section
Gas spring 3 years C-arm sliding section
Bushing 3 years C-arm sliding section
Cable routing 3 years Arm box, support column arm
arm clamp
<3> CAT-850B
Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Contactor 3 years For setting the tabletop vertical movement holding brake
ON/OFF
Potentiometer 3 years Tabletop vertical movement section, tabletop longitudinal
movement section, tabletop lateral movement section, and
tabletop rotation position detection section
Rechargeable 1 year Rechargeable battery for wireless foot switch (when a
battery wireless foot switch is used)
No. 2B308-307EN
401
<4> CAT-880B
Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Potentiometer 3 years Tabletop rotation
Contactor 5 years For servo amplifier drive power supply
SSR 5 years For tabletop rotation brake
5 years For servo motor brake
Zipper tube 3 years Tabletop rotation section (in the pit)
3 years Longitudinal tilting section
3 years Vertical movement section
Fastener tube 3 years Tabletop lateral movement section
Battery 2 years For TABLE CONT PWB
Disk spring 5 years For tabletop rotation locking
Fuse 1 year Tabletop rotation brake motor
For wireless foot switch power supply line
(when a wireless foot switch is used)
Rechargeable 1 year Rechargeable battery for wireless foot switch (when a
battery wireless foot switch is used)
<5> DFP-8000C/A2
Replacement
Part name Part number Quantity Application/Location
interval
Fuse ASF040*10A 3 1 year 10 A (slow-blow), system controller F1, F2, F3
ASF041*1A 5 1 year 1 A (time-lag), system cabinet F4,
system cabinet (T1) F11, F12,
XIDF-ESD801 F2
ASF041*2A 1 1 year 2 A (time-lag), XIDF-ESD801 F1
ASF041*5A 2 1 year 5 A (time-lag), system cabinet F5, F6
ASF051*2A 1 1 year 2 A (time-lag), system cabinet F10
1 year 15 A (slow-blow), CCB F1
ASF015*5A 1 year 5 A (time-lag), DVI-TX (F) F1
ASF026*3A 1 year 3 A (quick), SYS-IO F7, F10, F101
ASF026*6A 1 year 6 A (quick), SYS- IO F1, F2
ASF051*4A (*1) 1 1 year 4 A (time-lag) system cabinet F10
No. 2B308-307EN
402
<6> XTP-8100XG
Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Ion chamber 2 years Rotation section of the X-ray beam limiting device
relay cable (BLA-900A)
2 years Rotation section of the X-ray beam limiting device
(BLA-900C)
No. 2B308-307EN
403
(3) Consumable parts
<1> CD-R
For the operating procedures, refer to the operation manual provided with
the CD-R that is used.
<2> DVD±R
For the operating procedures, refer to the operation manual provided with
the DVD±R that is used.
No. 2B308-307EN
404
18.4 Cleaning
After operating the unit, clean the main unit, the optional units, and the room.
2. Turn OFF the power to the unit before cleaning. If the power is ON, a
malfunction may occur, resulting in an accident.
Entry of liquids such as water or detergent into the unit could result in
a short circuit or electric shock.
3. If the arm of the support unit needs to be moved during cleaning, turn
ON the power switch after fully wiping off liquid such as water and
detergent from the surrounding area of the support unit, and then
operate it in a normal manner. Forcible movement of the arm may
cause an error. After the arm is moved, immediately turn OFF the
power switch.
6. Cleaning of the support unit, top of the monitor support, ceiling rails,
and other units located high above the floor should be performed by a
professional cleaning agency. Because it is dangerous, never work on
a stepladder etc.
7. When the FPD cover etc. on the top of the arm of the support unit is to
be cleaned, set the arm rotation angle or slide angle to 90° to move the
part to be cleaned to a safely low position.
NOTICE: Do not clean the system with organic solvents (such as paint thinner) or
abrasive cleansers because they may cause surface damage or
discoloration.
No. 2B308-307EN
405
(1) Cleaning the unit
Wipe off stains with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent.
Wipe off the stains and then wipe the unit again with a dry soft cloth.
• When the cover is washed, the water temperature used for washing should
be 95°C or less.
• The cover should not be chlorine-bleached, dry cleaned, or ironed.
• When the cover is dried in a dryer, the temperature should be set to low.
• The tabletop mat cannot be washed. Clean it according to the procedure in
step (1) "Cleaning the unit".
No. 2B308-307EN
406
18.5 Disinfection
Disinfect the surfaces of the unit, accessories, and options according to the
instructions of the hospital's infection control officer.
WARNING: 1. After disinfection, ventilate the room thoroughly before turning ON the
power. If any flammable gases remain in the room, there is a danger of
fire or explosion when the power is turned ON.
3. Be sure to turn OFF the power of the unit before disinfection. If power
is supplied, an accident may occur due to unintended operation of the
unit when control switches are touched.
If liquid enters the unit, a fire or electric shock may occur.
NOTICE: 1. Do not use the types of disinfectants listed below. They will damage the
system. The performance and safety of the system cannot be guaranteed if
it has been damaged by use of an unsuitable disinfectant.
3. Wipe off disinfectants thoroughly after the system has been disinfected.
Failure to do so may result in discoloration or cracking of the surface finish or
in damage to rubber or plastic parts. If the system appears to be harmed by
a disinfectant, immediately stop using the system. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative for repair.
No. 2B308-307EN
407
(1) Recommended disinfectants
The disinfectants listed below can be used on this unit. Read the handling
instructions for the disinfectant to be used and fully understand its
characteristics and precautions before using it.
18.6 Sterilization
Sterilization cannot be performed for this system. If a sterile environment is
required, use sterile caps or sheets.
No. 2B308-307EN
408
18.7 Disposal of the System
This system contains harmful materials such as lead (for shielding X-rays)
and batteries. If these materials are left outdoors, environmental
contamination may result.
No. 2B308-307EN
409
18.8 Periodic Inspection Based on Requirements in the USA
(Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act)
Perform periodic inspection based on requirements in the USA.
The points to be checked in the periodic inspection are listed below.
Of the items required by the standards, items that are not included in the
following list have already been checked at the time of shipment from the
factory. It is not necessary to check these items again.
No. 2B308-307EN
410
19. Specifications
Contents 19.1 Electrical Safety
19.2 Support Unit
19.3 Catheterization Table
19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device
19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly
19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD)
19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit
19.8 TV Monitors (for Image Display)
19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG)
19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000C/A2)
19.11 Power Requirements
19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options
19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections
19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC)
No. 2B308-307EN
411
19.1 Electrical Safety
Classification and the standard values are based on IEC 60601-1.
No. 2B308-307EN
412
19.2 Support Unit
(1) System movement
CAS-810A/A2 CAS-830B/A1
C-arm rotation Movement range LAO120° to RAO120° (*1) LAO120° to RAO180° (*1, 3)
Rotation speed Max. 30°/s (*2)
C-arm sliding Movement range CRA50° to CAU45° (*1) CRA50° to CAU90° (*1, 4)
Sliding speed Max. 20°/s
FPD near/away Movement distance 350 mm 300 mm
movement Movement speed Max. 100 mm/s Max. 100 mm/s
SID (Distance 900 mm to 1250 mm 900 mm to 1200 mm
between X-ray focus
and FPD input
surface)
Support column rotation Movement range Approx. +90° to approx. -90° (*9) Approx. +135° to approx. -135°
Movement speed Manual 10°/s (*5)
Longitudinal movement in Movement range - 2100 mm (*6, 7)
the ceiling travel direction Movement speed - Max. 200 mm/s (*8)
Lateral movement in the Movement range - 900 mm (*6)
ceiling travel direction Movement speed - Max. 200 mm/s (*8)
*2) Refer to the table below for the C-arm rotation speed when radiography
is performed using the optional function.
*5) When operation is performed locally using the support column rotation
button on the support column of the support unit, the speed is limited to
6°/s.
No. 2B308-307EN
413
*8) When operation is performed locally using the support column rotation
button on the support column of the support unit, the speed is limited to
150 mm/s.
Other) While the Override button is held down, the operation speed is limited
to 1/3 of the maximum speed for all operations.
CAS-810A/A2 CAS-830B/A1
Isocenter height 1075 mm 1050 mm
Inner diameter of the C-arm Approx. 800 mm Approx. 890 mm
C-arm offset 450 mm (left) -
C-arm reach 1320 mm Approx. 890 mm
Focus-to-skin distance (FSD) Min. 300 mm Min. 300 mm
Focus-to-isocenter distance 750 mm 700 mm
(3) Mass
CAS-810A/A2 CAS-830B/A1
Main unit (*) Max. Approx. 920 kg Max. Approx.
1260 kg
Control cabinet Approx. 130 kg Approx. 130 kg
*) The mass includes that of the peripheral units such as the FPD, X-ray
tube assembly, etc.
(4) Finishing
Finish color: Standard white
(5) Input surface of the FPD and the central axis of the X-ray
beam cone
• 8-inch FPD or 12-inch FPD : The central axis of the X-ray beam cone is
perpendicular to the input surface of the
FPD.
No. 2B308-307EN
414
19.3 Catheterization Table
(1) System movement
CAT-850B CAT-880B
Longitudinal movement 1350 mm 1350 mm
Lateral movement ±200 mm ±200 mm
Tabletop rotation +90° to -180° -90° to +90°
Tabletop vertical movement stroke 775 mm to 1150 mm 754 mm to 1054 mm
Tabletop vertical movement speed Approx. 20 mm/s Approx. 20 mm/s
Tabletop tilting stroke - -16° to +16°
Tabletop tilting speed - Tabletop longitudinal tilting:
Approx. 1.5°/s Tabletop
lateral tilting: Approx. 3°/s
CAT-850B CAT-880B
Tabletop length 2950 mm 2950 mm
Tabletop width (chest) 450 mm 450 mm
CAT-850B/CAT-880B
Additional load at the time of 100 kg
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)
No. 2B308-307EN
415
19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device
BLA-900A BLA-900C
X-ray exposure field Maximum 400 × 400 mm (*1) 340 × 340 mm (*1)
(square)
Minimum 10 × 10 mm (*2)
Leakage dose Dose 0.75 mGy/h or less
(Including the leakage dose from the X-ray tube)
Conditions • 1000 mm from the focus
• 125 kV, 18 mA
Minimum inherent filtration 1.8 mm Aleq (*3) 2.0 mm Aleq (*3)
Beam hardening filter Filter F1: Copper 0.2 mm (Approx. 6 mm Aleq) (*3)
(Aluminum equivalent = F2: Copper 0.3 mm (Approx. 8 mm Aleq) (*3)
Value at a tube voltage
of 70 kV) F3: Aluminum 1.8 mm F3: Aluminum 2.0 mm
F4: Copper 0.5 mm (Approx. 13 mm Aleq) (*3)
F5: Copper 0.9 mm
(Approx. 22 mm Aleq) (*3)
Movement Automatic after registration in the acquisition program.
Compensation filters Material Stainless steel
Heart/straight type: Heart/straight type:
19 mm Aleq (*3) 19 mm Aleq (*3)
Straight type:
16 mm Aleq (*3)
Shape/Number Heart/straight type: Heart/straight type:
1 each for left/right 1 each for left/right
Straight type: 1
Rotation range Approx. ±60° Approx. ±135°
(Filter rotation, opening, (Filter rotation, opening, and
and closing can be closing can be performed
performed independently.) independently.)
Rotation time Approx. 3 seconds Approx. 4.5 seconds
/120° (minimum) /270° (minimum)
Automatic operation Programmed setting of compensation filter positions linked
with auto-positioning and stepping DSA is possible.
Beam limiting device Rotation range ±135°
rotation
*1) X-ray exposure field on a plane surface 900 mm away from the X-ray
focus
*2) X-ray exposure field on a plane surface 1330 mm away from the X-ray
focus
*3) Measurement conditions: "70 kV (HVL), 2.5 mm aluminum" or "75 kV
(HVL), 2.7 mm aluminum"
No. 2B308-307EN
416
19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly
X-ray tube assembly with liquid metal bearing
DSRX-T7345GFS DSRX-T7444GDS DSRX-T7445GFS
Focus size (mm) 0.3/0.6/1.0 0.5/0.8 0.4/0.6/0.9
Short-time maximum input (kW) 17/48/100 50/100 30/50/100
Target angle (°) 11 8 9
Anode heat capacity (kHU) 3,000 3,000 3,000
Maximum anode cooling rate 5.5 kW (7,700 HU/s) 5.5 kW (7,700 HU/s) 5.5 kW (7,700 HU/s)
Inherent filtration 1.1 mm Aleq 1.1 mm Aleq 1.1 mm Aleq
(Tube voltage 75 kV) (Tube voltage 75 kV) (Tube voltage 75 kV)
Total filtration For systems with the For systems with the For systems with the
BLA-900A: 2.9 mm Aleq BLA-900C: 3.1 mm Aleq BLA-900A: 2.9 mm Aleq
*) When the SID is reduced, the edges of the images may be missing.
*) The total filtration is the sum of the inherent filtration of the X-ray tube
assembly and the filtration of the beam hardening filter in the X-ray
beam limiting device. For the filtration of the beam hardening filter, refer
to subsection 19.4 "X-ray Beam Limiting Device".
No. 2B308-307EN
417
19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD)
8-inch FPD 12-inch FPD
TFP-800A/A1
TFP-800A/B1 TFP-1200A/B1
TFP-800A/C1 TFP-1200A/C2
TFP-800A/C2
FOV size 198.7 mm × 198.7 mm (8" × 8") 298.0 mm × 298.0 mm (12" × 12")
173.8 mm × 173.8 mm (7" × 7") 248.3 mm × 248.3 mm (10" × 10")
149.0 mm × 149.0 mm (6" × 6") 198.7 mm × 198.7 mm (8" × 8")
124.2 mm × 124.2 mm (5" × 5") 149.0 mm × 149.0 mm (6" × 6")
Active area 194 mm × 194 mm 294.1 mm × 294.1 mm
Pixel size 194 µm × 194 µm 194 µm × 194 µm
Output image 1024 × 1024 TFP-1200A/B1, TFP-1200A/C2:
format
(Digital output) • Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less 1536 × 1536
• Nonbinning • Acquisition rate of 6 fps or less
512 × 512 • Nonbinning for the entire area
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less 1024 × 1024
• Binning • Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the central area
768 × 768
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
512 × 512
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning for the central area
TFP-1200A/C2:
384 × 384
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
Output image 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video
format composite synchronization signal composite synchronization signal
(Analog output) 1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 Ω 1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 Ω
Resolution (Lp/mm) 2.6 (nonbinning) 2.6 (nonbinning)
DQE (%) TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1: TFP-1200A/B1:
65 or more 65 or more
TFP-800A/C1, TFP-800A/C2: TFP-1200A/C2:
77% (0 Lp/mm) 77% (0 Lp/mm)
No. 2B308-307EN
418
12 × 16-inch FPD
TFP-1216A/A1
TFP-1216A/C1
FOV size 298.0 mm × 397.3 mm (12" × 16")
298.0 mm × 298.0 mm (12" × 12")
198.7 mm × 198.7 mm (8" × 8")
149.0 mm × 149.0 mm (6" × 6")
Active area 292.2 mm × 391.5 mm
Pixel size 194 µm × 194 µm
Output image TFP-1216A/A1, TFP-1216A/C1:
format
(Digital output) 1536 × 2048
• Acquisition rate of 6 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the entire area
1024 × 1024
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the central area
768 × 1024
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
TFP-1216A/C1:
512 × 512
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the central area
384 × 512
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
Output image 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video
format composite synchronization signal 1 Vp-p,
(Analog output) termination resistor: 75 Ω
Resolution (Lp/mm) 2.6 (nonbinning)
DQE (%) TFP-1216A/A1:
65 or more (typical value)
TFP-1216/C1:
77% (0 Lp/mm)
No. 2B308-307EN
419
19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit
(1) Monitors
(2.2) MSF-56A/MSF-04A/MSF-06A
*2) 2946 mm when the lateral rails for flat panel monitor suspension XGMR-
MSF021 (option) is used in combination.
No. 2B308-307EN
420
19.8 TV Monitors (for Image Display)
(1) Standard monitors
No. 2B308-307EN
421
Monitor integration system
For the control room
Model name XMEZ-LMMCR1 (*2)
Monitor model name MX270W
Screen size 27 inches
Color/monochrome Color
Resolution 2560 × 1440 pixels
Maximum brightness 300 cd/m2
(0.7 Vp-p input)
Scanning frequency
Vertical 29.5 to 61 Hz
Horizontal 31 to 89 kHz
Automatic brightness Provided
control function
*1) This kit is for the large-screen monitor and includes the large-screen monitor
(the model name of the monitor is different from the model name of the kit).
*2) This kit is for the monitor integration system and includes the integrated
monitor (the model name of the monitor is different from the model name of
the kit).
*3) This monitor can be used in combination with the XMEZ-LMM021/A1.
No. 2B308-307EN
422
19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG)
(1) Rating
No. 2B308-307EN
423
(3) Fluoroscopy
(a) Fluoroscopy (continuous fluoroscopy)
*1) Systems shipped to the USA in June 2006 onwards have the following
specifications.
No. 2B308-307EN
424
19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000C/A2)
(1) Image input section
(a) Input image : 10242, 30 fps (maximum)
5122, 60 fps (maximum) (*1, 2)
NOTE: If software V8.0 or earlier has been upgraded to software V8.3 or later, the
image disk capacity is 200 GB (the same as before upgrade).
No. 2B308-307EN
425
(4) Fluoroscopy
(a) Input image : 10242, 16 bits
(b) Pulse rate (can be selected and set at the time of installation)
: Continuous, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20,
30 exp/s
(c) Fluoroscopy mode selection : Two modes (normal/high) (*1), three modes
(low/normal/high), or four modes
(low/mid/normal/high) are available.
*1) Two modes: Only for USA
• Image magnification
• Image rotation
• Subtraction
• Peak hold
• Image addition
No. 2B308-307EN
426
(5) Fluoroscopy roadmapping processing
No. 2B308-307EN
427
(7) Radiography
The following radiographic techniques can be set.
Using the DSA function, images of blood vessels only are extracted by
subtracting mask images acquired before injection of contrast medium from
contrast images acquired after injection of contrast medium. Continuous
DSA is performed by using pulsed X-rays to acquire radiographic images.
To enable subtraction to be performed correctly, the X-ray conditions in DSA
are fixed (the mask and contrast images must be acquired under the same
conditions).
No. 2B308-307EN
428
(b) DA function
No. 2B308-307EN
429
(e) Rotational DA function (optional)
• Acquisition mode
C-arm movement
Maximum movement speed
(rotation direction)
C-arm movement (LAO/RAO) 50°/s
C-arm sliding (CAU/CRA) 20°/s
No. 2B308-307EN
430
(f) Rotational DSA function (optional)
• X-ray radiation timing : The support unit angles at the time of each
mask image acquisition and the
corresponding contrast image acquisition
can be matched. (Angle trigger method)
No. 2B308-307EN
431
(h) 3D-DSA function (optional)
c) Bone image and blood vessel image extracted from contrast image of
3D-DSA images, and bone and blood vessel 3D display
a) 10242, 16 bits
*1) Superimposed display of the blood vessels and the device (device fusion)
can be performed using the corresponding workstation function.
*2) It is possible to superimpose and display blood vessel image and bone
image (bone fusion), depending on the function of the workstation used in
combination.
*3) When the maximum C-arm rotation speed of 30°/s is selected, acquisition is
performed at intervals of 1.2°/frame.
No. 2B308-307EN
432
(i) AlphaCT acquisition function (optional)
Images used to generate AlphaCT images (CBCT (Cone Beam CT) images)
are acquired.
• Rotation speed
a) 10242, 12 bits
AlphaCT-22s (quality)
acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of
approx. 600 frames, 10°/s
No. 2B308-307EN
433
(8) Image processing
The following image processing operations can be performed for
radiographic images in the control or examination room.
No. 2B308-307EN
434
(9) Analysis functions
(a) Distance measurement
(c) Calibration
(a) Image selection, image playback, and image processing for a desired patient
No. 2B308-307EN
435
(12) Image storage
(a) CD-R recording
No. 2B308-307EN
436
(13) Study appointments
(a) Number of appointments : 200 or more
(b) Appointment items : Patient ID, patient name, sex, date of birth,
study protocols, examining physician, other
• Keyboard entry
• DICOM MWM
• The previous images can be imported from the following locations to the
image disk.
• CD-R/DVD±R/DVD RAM
• Network server
No. 2B308-307EN
437
(15) Function for supporting personal information protection
and security countermeasures
• User authentication
• Urgent user
For the user who is not registered in the system, it is possible to use the
minimal functions required for performing examination.
• Screen lock
When the system is not used for a given length of time, it is possible to
automatically lock the screen. Note that if the system is being used in
examination, the screen is not locked.
(a) Display of the dose rate during fluoroscopy and radiography (fluoroscopic
monitor and system monitor)
(b) The total dose is displayed when neither fluoroscopy nor radiography is
being performed.
(d) DICOM MPPS or DICOM RDSR output of the total dose for each study as a
study result
(The dose information can also be stored as image data.)
No. 2B308-307EN
438
(17) Network function
The following network functions are supported. (A connection check is
required at the time of actual connection.)
(c) DICOM Query/Retrieve SCU, Storage SCP : Image search and image
retrieval
No. 2B308-307EN
439
19.11 Power Requirements
(1) Rating of the circuit breaker
(a) Three-phase power supply
NOTE: Since the system requires the large-capacity power supply, the system
cannot be used using the independent power plant.
No. 2B308-307EN
440
(4) Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
It is recommended that an ELCB be used to protect the power-supply circuit
from an earth fault.
Install an ELCB as described below:
No. 2B308-307EN
441
19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options
The maximum total weight of the accessories and options that can be used
in combination with the catheterization table is 20 kg. Calculate the total
weight referring to the table below.
(1) Accessories
(2) Options
No. 2B308-307EN
442
19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections
(1) Accessories
(2) Options
No. 2B308-307EN
443
19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC)
• IEC 60601-1: 2005 +A1: 2012
• IEC 60601-1-2: 2014
• IEC 60601-1-3: 2008 +A1: 2013
• IEC 60601-1-6: 2010 +A1: 2013
• IEC 60601-1-9: 2007 +A1: 2013
• IEC 60601-2-28: 2010
• IEC 60601-2-28: 2017
• IEC 60601-2-43: 2010 +A1: 2017
• IEC 62304: 2006 +A1: 2015
• IEC 62366: 2007 +A1: 2014
• IEC 60627: 2001
• IEC 60580: 2000
NOTE: The applicable standards (IEC) above are applicable to newly installed
systems. If this operation manual is supplied because of upgrade of the
installed product, the standards before the upgrade are applicable to your
system. In this case, check the applicable standards using the operation
manual supplied with the system. Alternatively, contact your service
representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
444
20. Technical Data
Contents 20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43
20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2
20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3
20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020
20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging
No. 2B308-307EN
445
20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43
The technical data required by IEC 60601-2-43 is given below.
• Radiography
• Fluoroscopy
• Radiography
• Fluoroscopy
• Operating mode
• Class I
No. 2B308-307EN
446
(5) Tests
This unit meets test items required by IEC 60601-2-43 in the ranges
described below.
Test conditions A B C D E F
Tube voltage (kV) 50 125 62 100 62 100
Tube current (mA) 630 20 80 32 100 50
Acquisition time (ms) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Reproducibility (R) R R R R
Linearity (L) L L L L
Thickness of aluminum 10 45 21 34 21 34
(mm)
Beam hardening filter F3
• Accuracy
No. 2B308-307EN
447
(8) Patient entrance reference point
In this system, the following point is specified as the patient entrance
reference point.
The distance between the X-ray focus and the patient entrance reference
point is regarded as the average focus-to-skin distance.
NOTE: For the reference air kerma rate, the influence of backscatter radiation is not
included in accordance with the measurement method described in IEC
60601-2-43. The reference value may vary depending on the settings.
No. 2B308-307EN
448
(9) Radiation data
Reference air kerma data is provided for the patient exposure reference
point specified by IEC 60601-2-43. The tube voltage, tube current, pulse
width, and additional filter are automatically selected according to the
selected program.
NOTE: The reference air kerma data for systems (SP cardiac systems, SP vascular
systems, DP cardiac systems) with the floor-mounted C-arm support CAS-
810A is provided. The reference air kerma data for systems (DP vascular
systems) with the ceiling-suspended tube support CAS-830B can be
obtained by multiplying the provided values by the conversion factor given
below.
The skin dose level varies according to the conditions, and a risk of radiation
exposure is present even in normal use. The settings that affect the skin
dose level and the available settings are described below.
• Pulse rate
Fluoroscopy : Continuous, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps
(Only preset rates are displayed.)
DA : 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 30, 60 fps
DSA : 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15, 30 fps
No. 2B308-307EN
449
• Dose setting
No. 2B308-307EN
450
(10) Dose data for systems with the TFP-800A
(10.1) Cardiac protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
High 15 16.5 23.8 28.8 33.5
Normal 15 24.1 29.6 33.6 36.8
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 15.7 20.8 25.8 28.1
Low 10 5.4 7.3 9.2 10.6
DT fluoroscopy Middle 15 18.5 18.9 21.3 29.9
Fluoroscopy roadmap Middle 15 22.7 30.4 34.1 37.4
HLC fluoroscopy Middle 15 10.3 11.0 12.7 20.4
(Unit: mGy/min)
<Measurement conditions>
Beam hardening
Dose Rate (f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Auto 15 Auto High High
Normal High 15 Auto Normal Low
Middle Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Low Low 10 F4 Normal High
15 fps
30 fps 20 fps
or less
Ratio 0.67 0.83 1.0
No. 2B308-307EN
451
• Beam hardening filter : When Auto is selected, the filter is
automatically selected according to the
object to be examined.
High
Low Normal
(HLC)
Japan 25 50 125
USA, etc. 44 87 175
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) Dose limit setting for Normal and HLC
mode is performed in accordance with
the applicable regulations in each country
or region.
No. 2B308-307EN
452
(b) Reference air kerma for radiography
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
CAG15 15 0.1 0.15 0.17 0.19
DA LV15 15 0.1 0.15 0.17 0.19
DT DA 15 0.1 0.13 0.15 0.15
One shot One shot 1.29 1.41 1.51 1.56
DSA DSA10fps 10 2.44 2.55 2.84 3.01
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
• Beam hardening filter : When Auto is selected for DA, the beam
filter is automatically selected according to
the radiographic conditions.
No. 2B308-307EN
453
(10.2) Angio protocol
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DSA3fps 3 1.7 1.81 1.9 1.92
DSA
DSA6fps 6 1.12 1.21 1.31 1.42
DA15fps 15 0.1 0.15 0.17 0.19
DA
DT DA 15 0.1 0.13 0.15 0.15
One shot One shot 1.29 1.41 1.51 1.56
3D 3D 25 1.46
AlphaCT AlphaCT 30 0.88
Middle
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).
No. 2B308-307EN
454
(10.3) EP protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
High 15 15.6 21.3 25.9 30.0
Normal 7.5 6.09 8.22 10.6 11.4
Fluoroscopy
Middle 7.5 3.96 5.58 7.12 7.7
Low 5 2.13 2.97 3.85 4.25
HLC
Low 5 8.8 11.7 13.6 15.4
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (a).
Beam hardening
Dose Rate(f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Normal Normal 7.5 Auto Normal High
Middle Low 7.5 Auto Normal High
Low Low 5 F5 (F4) Normal High
No. 2B308-307EN
455
(b) Reference air kerma for radiography
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.07 0.09 0.12 0.13
LV15 15 0.07 0.11 0.12 0.12
One shot One shot 0.6 0.71 0.77 0.8
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.3 2.08 2.26 2.6
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).
No. 2B308-307EN
456
(10.4) Pediatric protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 17.3 23.5 28.2 29.8
Normal 15 15.8 21.0 26.2 28.1
Middle 15 11.4 16.1 19.5 22.4
Low 7.5 3.3 4.5 5.8 6.4
DT
Middle 15 12.8 18.6 22.9 23.5
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 22.7 32.4 38.9 45.3
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (a).
Beam hardening
Dose Rate (f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Normal 20 Auto Normal Low
Normal Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Middle Normal 15 Auto Low High
Low Low 7.5 F5 (F4) Low High
The maximum fluoroscopic dose is limited by the dose limit setting. The
dose in Low mode is limited to 50% of that in Normal mode.
No. 2B308-307EN
457
(b) Reference air kerma for radiography
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.1 0.15 0.17 0.19
LV30 30 0.1 0.15 0.17 0.19
DT DA 15 0.11 0.14 0.15 0.16
One shot 1.32 1.43 1.53 1.55
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.24 1.25 1.26 1.21
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).
The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.
No. 2B308-307EN
458
(11) Dose data for systems with the TFP-1200A
(11.1) Cardiac protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 15.9 16.3 19.4 30.4
Normal 15 21.9 23.6 25.3 33.8
Middle 15 14.2 15.4 17.2 25.8
Low 10 4.5 4.8 5.8 9.0
DT
Middle 15 18.3 25.0 28.6 29.6
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 22.5 22.9 25.7 33.6
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 10.9 15.9 18.9 22.7
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.12 0.12 0.13 0.18
LV15 15 0.12 0.12 0.13 0.18
DT DA 15 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.15
One shot One shot 1.55 1.54 1.67 1.75
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.60 1.64 2.77 2.79
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).
No. 2B308-307EN
459
(11.2) Angio protocol
For the acquisition programs other than those specified below, refer to (11.1)
(b).
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DSA DSA3fps 3 1.09 1.64 2.02 2.46
DSA6fps 6 0.75 1.1 1.39 1.56
DA15fps 15 0.12 0.12 0.13 0.18
DA
DT DA 15 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.15
One shot One shot 1.55 1.54 1.67 1.75
3D 3D 25 1.17 1.46
AlphaCT AlphaCT 30 0.81 0.88
Middle
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.2) (b).
No. 2B308-307EN
460
(11.3) EP protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 14.7 15.4 17.6 26.4
Normal 7.5 5.13 5.58 6.46 10.1
Middle 7.5 3.45 3.74 4.33 6.9
Low 5 2.27 2.42 2.93 4.62
HLC
Middle 5 8.07 8.66 9.83 14.1
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.07 0.07 0.08 0.12
LV15 15 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.12
One shot One shot 0.65 0.65 0.73 0.91
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.58 1.56 1.64 2.51
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.3) (b).
No. 2B308-307EN
461
(11.4) Pediatric protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 16.3 16.6 19.8 27.5
Normal 15 14.3 15.1 18.3 26.0
Middle 15 10.3 10.6 12.8 19.8
Low 7.5 3.4 3.7 4.3 7.0
DT
Middle 15 12.4 13.4 15.4 24.3
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 23.3 24.5 28.6 44.7
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.12 0.12 0.13 0.18
LV30 30 0.12 0.12 0.13 0.18
DT DA 15 0.11 0.11 0.12 0.15
One shot One shot 1.56 1.58 1.67 1.83
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.67 1.74 1.64 1.54
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).
No. 2B308-307EN
462
(11.5) Cardiac-Low, Angio-Low, and Pediatric-Low protocols
The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.
No. 2B308-307EN
463
(12) Dose data for systems with the TFP-1216A
(12.1) Cardiac protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 15 10.3 14.1 24.4 33.5
Normal 15 14.8 18.7 27.9 34.9
Middle 15 9.5 13.5 21.9 26.5
Low 10 3.2 4.4 7.3 10.1
DT
Middle 15 11.5 17.0 25.5 29.5
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 14.7 18.9 29.1 34.3
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 6.97 9.5 16.9 21.7
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.05 0.07 0.12 0.19
LV15 15 0.05 0.07 0.12 0.19
DT DA 15 0.09 0.09 0.1 0.14
One shot One shot 1.55 1.54 1.67 1.75
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.6 1.64 2.77 2.79
(Unit: mGy/f)
No. 2B308-307EN
464
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).
For the acquisition programs other than those specified below, refer to (12.1)
(b).
FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DSA DSA3fps 3 1.06 1.57 2.07 2.42
DSA6fps 6 0.64 0.68 1.36 1.52
DA15fps 15 0.05 0.07 0.12 0.19
DA
DT DA 15 0.09 0.09 0.1 0.14
One shot One shot 1.55 1.54 1.67 1.75
3D 3D 25 1.17 1.46
AlphaCT AlphaCT 30 0.81 0.88
Middle
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.2) (b).
No. 2B308-307EN
465
(12.3) EP protocol
FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch ×
Frontal Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 15 10.0 13.3 23.3 28.0
Normal 7.5 3.45 4.77 8.4 11.0
Middle 7.5 2.27 3.3 5.7 7.9
Low 5 1.61 2.2 3.8 5.1
HLC
Low 5 5.28 7.2 12.3 15.6
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.05 0.05 0.07 0.11
LV15 15 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.12
One shot One shot 0.65 0.65 0.73 0.91
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.58 1.56 1.64 2.51
(Unit: mGy/f)
No. 2B308-307EN
466
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.3) (b).
FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 20 10.3 13.9 24.4 28.6
Normal 15 10.0 13.6 23.5 27.6
Middle 15 6.9 9.6 16.1 22.3
Low 7.5 2.4 3.3 5.7 7.9
DT
Middle 15 9.0 11.4 19.6 27.1
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 16.0 21.6 37.1 48.7
fluoroscopy
(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.
<Measurement conditions>
No. 2B308-307EN
467
(b) Reference air kerma for radiography
FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.05 0.07 0.12 0.19
LV30 30 0.05 0.07 0.12 0.19
DT DA 15 0.09 0.09 0.11 0.15
One shot One shot 0.86 1.42 1.56 1.65
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.66 1.61 1.62 1.45
(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>
For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).
The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.
No. 2B308-307EN
468
(13) Distribution of stray radiation
The distribution maps of stray radiation required by IEC 60601-2-43.
(13.1) CAS-810A/A2
(a) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 100 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
(b) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 150 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
No. 2B308-307EN
469
(c) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 100 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
(d) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 150 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
No. 2B308-307EN
470
(13.2) CAS-830B
(a) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 100 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
(b) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 150 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
No. 2B308-307EN
471
(c) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 100 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
(d) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 150 cm above the floor
Unit: µGy/(Gycm2)
No. 2B308-307EN
472
(14) Measurement conditions
(a) Fluoroscopic tube voltage: 125 kV
No. 2B308-307EN
473
20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2
The technical data required by IEC 60601-1-2 is provided below.
NOTE: The technical data in this subsection is applicable to newly installed systems.
If this operation manual is supplied because of upgrade of the installed
product, the information provided in the operation manual supplied with the
system before the upgrade is applicable to your system.
In this case, check the technical data using the operation manual supplied
with the system. Alternatively, contact your service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
474
20.2.4 Technical data
(1) Classification and applicable standards
• Classification
• Applicable standards
No. 2B308-307EN
475
(3) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic emissions -
(a) Alphenix
No. 2B308-307EN
476
(4) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
(a) Alphenix
No. 2B308-307EN
477
(5) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
for EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not
LIFE-SUPPORTING
No. 2B308-307EN
478
(6) Recommended separation distances between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment and the Alphenix for
EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not
LIFE-SUPPORTING
No. 2B308-307EN
479
20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3
The technical data required by IEC 60601-1-3 is given below.
The maximum value is within +20% of the minimum value (maximum value /
minimum value < 1.2)
600
400
400
600
500 600 Significant zone
of occupancy
(Unit: mm)
No. 2B308-307EN
480
The graph is normalized by long-time rating 2.2 kW (conversion
at 125 kV/18 mA).
No. 2B308-307EN
481
20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020
The technical data required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020 is given below.
(1) Reproducibility
CV ≤ 0.045 (CV: Coefficient of variation)
(2) Linearity
X1 − X 2
≤0.09
X1 + X 2
The following are the maximum deviations from the indicated mA setting.
No. 2B308-307EN
482
(1.3) Exposure time value indication
The maximum deviation from the indicated exposure time setting and
following exposure in automatic exposure control is as follows.
RADIOGRAPHY
The exposure time is defined as the interval between the time (A) that the
tube potential reaches 75% of the observed tube voltage crest value and the
time (B) that it falls back to the 75% level.
PULSED FLUOROSCOPY
The exposure time is defined based on the signal from the PC2 board in the
power cabinet of X-ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100XG.
Measurement location: Between TP28 and TP33
No. 2B308-307EN
483
(2) Technique factors during fluoroscopy
(2.1) mA value indication (Continuous fluoroscopy only)
(b) From 1 mA to 4 mA
5 minutes +0%
− 5%
+0%
− 5%
No. 2B308-307EN
484
Table 1 Test instrumentation errors
Test instrument
Item Error
MFG Type
Radiographic mA Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. MA-1201DC or ±0.5%
MA-2000
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 1%
Radiographic kV Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. KV-201D ±2%
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 with 2%
R/F
Radiographic Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. TD-3A ±0.5%±1 dgt
time
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 with 0.5%
R/F
Fluoroscopic kV Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. KV-201D ±2%
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 with 2%
R/F
Fluoroscopic mA Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. MA-1201DC or ±0.5%
MA-2000
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 1%
No. 2B308-307EN
485
20.4.3 Reference location
In this system, the reference location for which the AKR (air kerma rate) and
cumulative air kerma are displayed is specified as below.
Patient
50 mm
Reference point
Reference location
Tabletop mat
Tabletop
LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°
No. 2B308-307EN
486
X-ray center axis
X-ray detector
100 mm (*1)
Patient
Reference point
Reference location
Tabletop mat
Tabletop
No. 2B308-307EN
487
20.4.4 Modes of operation
(1) Modes
(1.1) Fluoroscopy
(1.2) Radiography
(d) Rotational DA
(f) 3D-DSA
(d) In automatic control, X-ray conditions are determined by video signals sent
from the FPD.
(f) For detailed specifications, refer to subsection 19.9 (3) "Fluoroscopy" and
subsection 19.10 (4) "Fluoroscopy".
No. 2B308-307EN
488
(2.2) Radiography
(c) In automatic control, the X-ray condition setting procedure differs according
to the type of radiography.
No. 2B308-307EN
489
20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging
This information is only for the U.S.A.
Use special care when imaging patients outside the typical adult size range.
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/RadiationEmitting
ProductsandProcedures/MedicalImaging/ucm298899.htm
https://us.medical.canon/education/institute-advanced-imaging/
http://www.pedrad.org/associations/5364/ig/?page=664
http://www.aapm.org/default.asp
http://www.asrt.org/
No. 2B308-307EN
490
21. System Message Display
In this system, a message may be displayed on the monitor to notify the user
of the system status.
No. 2B308-307EN
491
21.1 Message Display Section
Depending on the message type and status, the message may be displayed
on the reference monitor, fluoroscopy monitor, or system monitor. Take
appropriate measures according to the displayed message.
Note that the message display section may differ depending on the setting at
the time of system installation. Check the message display section.
No. 2B308-307EN
492
21.2 Message Types
There are four types of messages.
Example:
No. 2B308-307EN
493
21.3 Corrective Actions
When a message is displayed, take appropriate corrective action according
to the message. If it not clear what action should be taken, check the table
on the following pages.
NOTE: 1. If the error cannot be reset or the same error occurs repeatedly, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative for inspection and repair.
2. If the corrective action for the error is not clear, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
SC : Service center
SW : Switch
Trig SW : C-arm/tabletop operation start lever or the auto-positioning start
button of the tableside console.
BP : Biplane
No. 2B308-307EN
494
Message Action
The beam limiting device blades are closed.
Open the blades.
No. 2B308-307EN
495
Message Action
A Apex and positions of both SM0829 Set a longer distance between the valve and the cardiac
valves too close. apex and then perform tracing again.
Arm cannot be moved to the SM1552 The selected position cannot be set as the radiographic
selected position. region due to system movement restrictions. Select another
position.
Arm could not move to preset SM0522 The C-arm cannot be moved to the preset position.
position.
Arm pos. not specified. SM0425 Set the support unit to a position where rotational DA is
Perform setting again. SM0427 possible.
SM0995
Arm rotation speed was SM0544 The C-arm operational speed for rotational DSA is
automatically adjusted. SM1040 automatically set.
Auto-detect of spherical SM0787 Detect the contour of the steel ball again.
phantom failed.
Auto Photo has failed. SM1650 The auto-photo function could not be executed. Try again.
If auto-photo still cannot be started, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
Auto-pos. impossible with SM0078 Auto-positioning cannot be executed with the selected
selected No. SM0982 number. Select another auto-positioning number.
Auto-pos. STORE disabled SM0070 This auto-positioning cannot be executed before the start of
before study start. a study. Try again after the study is started.
AUTO MAP disabled during SM0042 Auto-mapping is not possible during continuous playback.
continuous playback.
AUTO MAP failed. SM0012 The auto-map function could not be executed. Try again. If
auto-mapping still cannot be started, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
Authorization is required to SM1064 This processing cannot be executed with the authority level
perform processing. of the user currently logged in to the system. The system
must be logged in to by a person with the authority level for
this processing to execute this processing.
Avg. process umber exceeded SM0786 The number of segments exceeded the upper limit during
upper limit. distance calibration.
B Backup failed. HP0034 If this message is displayed even after retry, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
C Cannot reach the specified SM0436 If this message is displayed when the Ω-arm is switched to
position. SM1212
the RL orientation or LL orientation, set the C-arm floor
SM1213
base rotation angle to within the range of ±45°. If the same
SM1214
message is displayed again after the angle is changed,
SM1215
perform auto-positioning as shown below.
• When the Ω-arm is switched to the RL orientation : No. 71
• When the Ω-arm is switched to the LL orientation : No. 70
Can't switch system. Move SM0264 System switching has failed. Return the system to the
arm/tabletop to original pos. original system and then use the system.
• 0° layout system
Reset the CAS-810A support column rotation angle to its
original angle.
• 90° layout system
Reset the catheterization tabletop rotation angle to its
original angle.
No. 2B308-307EN
496
Message Action
C Communication error with SM1538 Contact the CARTO 3 information desk. For information
CARTO. Check CARTO. concerning the CARTO 3 information desk, refer to the
operation manual provided with CARTO 3.
Centerline analysis is not SM0878 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
possible. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Centerline analysis with heart SM0830 The cardiac centerlines for ED and ES may differ
contour not possible. significantly.
Confirm that the correct analysis target image is used and
that tracing is performed appropriately.
Check arm status. SM0363 The C-arm is not at the set position. Move the C-arm to the
Reset arm to the set position. set position.
Check each stage view. SM0368 Perform fluoroscopy and check the field from the first stage
to the last stage.
Check each stage view. SM0365 Perform fluoroscopy and check all the fields. After all the
Then select [Fix View]. fields are checked, set [Fix View] to ON.
Collimator is operating. SM0060 Release the operating switch and stop the X-ray beam
SM0063 limiting device. (Frontal)
Comm with in-room con soles SM1210 An error related to the X-ray beam limiting device has
failed. Ltd functions occurred. The X-ray beam limiting device cannot be used.
The support unit can be operated as usual.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Collimator) Commun. failed. SM0059 Communication with the X-ray beam limiting device is
Auto-pos. is limited. SM0062 broken. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Connection to the backup file HP0066 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
transfer destination failed. representative.
(Console unit) Commun. failed. SM0118 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Console disabled. representative.
Creation of mask image failed. SM0016 The system has failed in mask image creation. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Creation of F-MASK failed. SM0015 The system has failed in mask image creation. The display
Change to normal fluoro. will change to normal fluoroscopic images. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Correction line crosses edge on SM0782 Of the two lines drawn by vessel contour detection, select
opposite side. one line as the correction target.
D Data transfer error. SM0037 The system has failed in data transfer. The data transfer
Node/Device name not destination name or device name may be set incorrectly.
recognized. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative. Check the setting in Utility mode.
Data transfer failed. SM0039 The system has failed in data transfer. Try again. If data
transfer fails again, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
DB is abnormal. Reset SM1078 Perform system reset.
software. SM1173 To perform full reset of the software, select Restart.
SM1174 To perform partial reset of the software, select Partial
SM1175 Reset.
DC power supply error. SM0126 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Call service. SM0127 representative. The DC power supply of the SYSIO is
defective.
No. 2B308-307EN
497
Message Action
D DDS image transfer failed. SM1448 Transfer the image after fluoroscopy/radiography is
completed. If the error is not resolved, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
DICOM file does not exist or SM0874 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
may be damaged. Systems service representative.
Disk write error. SM1182 System local processing failed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
Display image differs from SM0922 Use images selected from the same dynamic image.
registered ED or ES image.
Dose meter abnormal. Dose SM0081 The system has failed in concurrent display of normal
info. disabled. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). The display will change to
normal fluoroscopic images. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Do Test Shot or press [Cond. SM0344 Perform test exposure or press the Cond. Setting button
setting] to skip test.
Do test shot or move to next SM0379 Perform test exposure or move the tabletop to the next
stage. SM0480 stage.
Do test shot, set Mask/Cont SM0372 Perform test exposure. Alternatively, press the Mask →
button ON, or step tabletop. SM0481 Contrast button or move the tabletop to the next stage.
Do test shot or set Mask/Cont SM0373
Perform test exposure or press the Mask → Contrast
button ON. SM0482 button.
Do Test Shot or select trigger SM0525 Perform test exposure. Alternatively, press the auto-
SW. positioning start button on the tableside console or press
the Arm/tabletop movement start lever of the tableside
console. Check the console configured in the system.
Do Test Shot or select [Confirm SM0526 Perform test exposure or press the Confirm Cond. button.
Cond.].
Do Test Shot/move arm to end SM0533 Perform test exposure or press the Set End button after
& select [Set End]. moving the C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA.
E Emergency SW pressed. SM0158 Eliminate the cause of the emergency stop and press the
Movement is limited. reset switch. If the cause cannot be eliminated, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Emergency SW pressed. SM0551 The settings are cleared because the emergency stop
Start setting from 1st step. SM0553 button was pressed. Perform setting again.
SM1059
Error detected during acquisition SM0155 An error has been detected during preparation for
preparation. SM0156 fluoroscopic processing at the start of fluoroscopic image
recording. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Error detected during image SM0140 The system recovers automatically. If this error occurs
processing. again after system recovery, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Error in collimator. SM0061 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
SM0064
representative.
Error in communication with SM1188 Printing processing failed. Contact your Canon Medical
imager. Systems service representative.
Error found in SNRF PWB. SM1545 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Switching to bckup fluoro. representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
498
Message Action
E Error in image transfer to server. SM1183 Network processing failed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Error in RTC-SIO. SM1542 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
X-ray exp prohibited. representative.
Error in support unit. SM0045 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
SM0053
representative.
Error in table. SM0067 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
SM1347
representative.
When the operating table is used in combination: An error
has occurred in the operating table. If the brake for column
rotation of the table is released or loose, securely fix the
table with the brake. If the error cannot be cleared, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Exam room door is open. X-ray SM0380 Close the examination room door.
SM0402
disabled.
Exam room door is open. SM0466 Close the examination room door.
Radiography disabled.
Exam room door is open. SM0467 Close the examination room door.
F File already exists. SM0809 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
File not found. SM0808 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
File read error SM0812 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
File write error SM0811 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Fluoroscopy could not be SM0757 Retry start of fluoroscopy.
started. Retry.
Fluoroscopy could not be SM0758 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
started. Call service. representative.
For HSBP fluoro, only normal SM0505 Perform normal fluoroscopy during the operation of high-
fluoro. is enabled speed biplane fluoroscopy.
FOV size different. SM1567 Different FOVs are used for the mask image and for the
Switched to normal fluoro. contrast image.
(F OPTI/F) Communication SM0144 Communication with the frontal OPTI/F is disabled.
error. Reboot system. Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Frontal) Do fluoroscopy before SM0255 Execute fluoroscopy for approximately 2 seconds for the
radiography. radiographic region before executing radiography.
(Frontal) Perform fluoroscopy. SM0138 Perform fluoroscopy on the frontal side.
(Frontal Tube) Housing SM0134 Immediately terminate X-ray generation and wait until the
overheating probable. X-ray tube cools. Check the air conditioning of the room
where the water cooling unit is installed. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(Frontal tube) LM frozen. X-ray SM0100 The frozen liquid bearing is being unfrozen. Wait for some
disabled. Please wait. time and try again. If X-rays still cannot be generated,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(F CCDIF) Test pattern SM0464 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
abnormal. Call service. representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
499
Message Action
F (F CCD camera) SM0098 Communication with the frontal CCD camera is disabled.
Communication failed. Reboot SM0142 Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system. Contact
system. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F HV-GEN.) Communication SM0113 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
failed. X-ray disabled.
F Fluoro is interrupted. (10min. SM0698 Set the fluoroscopy switch to OFF. To continue fluoroscopy,
timer) Restart fluoro. set the fluoroscopy switch to ON.
(FPD) Abnormal images Call SM0962 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
(FPD) Preparation error. Call SM0966 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
(FPD) Temp. error. Power was SM0969 The power of the FPD was turned OFF due to detection of
turned OFF. abnormal FPD temperature.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
For the biplane system, use the other FPD and terminate the
examination.
(FPD) Temp. error. Power will SM0968 The power of the FPD will be turned OFF after five minutes
be OFF in 5 min. due to detection of abnormal FPD temperature.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(FPD) Temp. error. Shut down SM0581 The system power supply is shut down automatically in five
starts in 5 min. minutes. Discontinue the examination after confirming safety
and save the data. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
(F FPD) Communication error. SM0561 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is disabled.
X-ray disabled. SM1159 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Control impossible. SM0569 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is disabled.
X-ray disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) error If fluoro/rad SM0515 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
disabled, call service.
(F FPD) Image processing PWB SM0563 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
(F FPD) preparation mode. SM0513 After completion of the radiographic preparations of the FPD
X-ray disabled. for the frontal plane, start radiography for the frontal plane.
(F FPD) Power supply error. SM0559 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is disabled.
X-ray disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD I/F) PWB is not installed. SM0509 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
X-ray disabled.
(F FPD I/F) PWB control is SM0511 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
impossible. X-ray disabled.
(F FPD I/F) PWB image size SM0517 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
(F FPD I/F) PWB error. SM0519 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) I/F PWB ver. SM1436 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
correction impossible.
(F FPD I/F) Test pattern error. SM0565 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Call service.
(FPD) Temp. error. Shutdown SM0577 Stop using the system and contact your Canon Medical
system & call service. Systems service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
500
Message Action
F (FPD) Version error Call service. SM0964 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature high. Call SM0578 Reduce the temperature in the examination room. If the error
service. occurs after the room temperature has been reduced, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature low. Call SM0580 Increase the temperature in the examination room. If the
service. error occurs after the room temperature has been increased,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature sensor SM0585 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error. Call service.
(F FPD) Temperature detect SM0586 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error. Call service.
(F FPD) Test pattern error. Call SM0587 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
For the password, enter 8 or HP0043 Enter the password again following the instructions. For
more characters including 1 or details for the password, refer to section 9 of the reference
more special symbols. manual.
F-side fluoro. is performed with SM0261 Set a lower dose and perform fluoroscopy.
lower X-ray cond.
F-REC error. Decrease pulse SM0157 A fluoroscopic image recording error occurred. Reduce the
rate or create storage space. fluoroscopic pulse rate (e/s) or delete unnecessary data using
the Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. There is insufficient free space for
fluorography in the RAID.
F-side fluoro. is performed with SM0261 The X-ray conditions on the frontal side are automatically
lower X-ray cond. lowered in fluoroscopy.
F-Rec canceled. Disabled SM0083 Fluoroscopic image recording has been canceled.
during F-MASK/F-SUB. Fluoroscopic image recording is not possible during mask
generation, fluoroscopic subtraction, or fluoroscopic landmark
image display. Wait until these processing operations are
completed and then try again.
G GCM PWB is not installed SM1131 System check is required. Contact your Canon Medical
Fluoro and rad enabled. SM1132 Systems service representative.
The system can be operated as usual even if this message is
displayed.
Generator & tube prep mode. SM0263 The X-ray high-voltage generator and the X-ray tube
Please wait. assembly are getting ready. Wait until they are ready.
GPU PWB not mounted. SM1550 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Backup fluoro continued.
Graph display in centerline SM0879 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
analysis is not possible. recommended that tracing be performed again.
H H11 A01 Hardware error. SM0189 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H12 A02 Hardware error. SM0190 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H13 A03 Hardware error. SM0191 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H14 A04 Hardware error. SM0192 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
501
Message Action
H H18 M.C. PWB hardware err. SM1375 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H19 A.C. PWB hardware err. SM1376 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H1D tableside console PWB SM1377 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error
H1E Satellite console PWB SM1378 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error
H20 A01 Support unit battery SM0194 The battery power resource for memory backup is running
voltage low. short. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H21 A01 Software error. SM0195 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H21 Console Control PWB SM0182 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize err. Cons
disabled.
H21 Table PWB initialize err. SM0159 The table vertical movement axis and tabletop longitudinal
Operation is limited. movement axis do not operate. Linked operations such as
auto-positioning and stepping DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H22 A02 Software error. SM0196 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H22 Table PCL5014 init. error. SM0160 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven by
Operation is limited the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H23 A03 Software error. SM0197 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H23 Tableside console PWB SM0161 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error.
H24 A04 Software error. SM0198 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H24 Satellite console PWB SM0162 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error.
H25 CAN error. Support unit SM0199 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
set to single operation rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
mode. Medical Systems service representative.
H25 CAN error Table switched SM0163 Linked operations such as table auto-positioning and stepping
to single oper. mode. DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H25 Console Control CAN SM0183 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
commun. error Cons
disabled.
H26 BU Memory abnormal. SM0164 Linked operations such as table auto-positioning and stepping
Table operation is limited. DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H26 CAN error. Support unit SM0200 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
set to single operation rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
mode. Medical Systems service representative.
H28 M. Net error. Support unit SM1379 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
502
Message Action
H H29 M. Net error. Support unit SM1380 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H2A BBM data abnormal. SM0202 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
Support unit op. is limited rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H2B M.C. PWB battery voltage SM1381 The memory backup battery level is low. Contact your
is low. Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H30 M. Net err. Table- side SM1391 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H31 Table U/D backup sensor SM0165 Backup sensor error for the table vertical movement axis.
error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative. Operations are not restricted.
H31 M. Net err. Table- side SM1392 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H32 M. Net err. Satel- lite SM1393 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H33 M. Net err. Satel- lite SM1394 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H35 Tabletop tilt backup SM0441 Tabletop tilt axis backup sensor error. Contact your Canon
sensor error. Medical Systems representative.
H41 Table U/D driver error. SM0166 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Vertical op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H42 Table long. driver error. SM0167 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Long. op. disabled. by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H43 Rotation motor driver SM0203 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked
failure. Rot. op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H44 Slide motor driver failure. SM0204 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H45 Detector near/away motor SM0205 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate.
failure. Op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H45 Table tilt driver error. Tilt SM0442 Tabletop tilting is disabled. Contact your Canon Medical
operation is disabled. Systems representative.
H46 Ceiling long. motor driver SM0206 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
failure. Op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H47 Ceiling lateral motor driver SM0207 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
failure. Op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
503
Message Action
H H48 Ceiling rotation motor SM0208 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
driver failure. Op. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
disabled. performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H49 Collimator rotation motor SM0927 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
driver failure Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H4A FPD rotation motor driver SM0928 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
failure Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H4B Floor base rotation motor SM0929 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
driver failure Op. disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H4E Support col. rot. mot. SM0930 Support column rotation of the support unit cannot be
driver failure Op. disabled. performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H4F Col slide motor driver SM1384 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
failed. Slide disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H53 Rotation axis limit sw SM0210 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
actuated. Op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H54 Slide axis limit sw SM0211 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations such
actuated. Op. disabled. as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H55 Detector N/A axis limit sw SM0212 The I.I. near/away movement axis does not operate. Linked
actuated. Op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H55 Table tilt sensor error. SM0443 There are some limitations in tabletop tilting. Contact your
Table op. is limited. Canon Medical Systems representative.
H61 Table U/D sensor error. SM0168 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Auto operation disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H62 Table long. sensor error. SM0169 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Auto op. disabled. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H63 Rotation sensor error. SM0213 The main rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
Axis operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H64 Slide sensor error. Axis SM0214 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations such
operation disabled. as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H64 Table rot. sensor error. SM0170 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
Auto operation disabled. cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
504
Message Action
H H65 Detector N/A sensor error. SM0215 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate. Linked
Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H65 Table tilt sensor error. SM0444 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
Auto operation is disabled. your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H66 Ceiling long. sensor error. SM0216 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H67 Ceiling lateral sensor SM0217 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
error. Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H68 Ceiling rot. sensor error. SM0218 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
Axis op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H69 Collimator rotation axis SM0931 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H6A FPD rotation axis sensor SM0932 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H6B Floor base rotation axis SM0933 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
sensor error. Op. disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H6E Support column rotation SM0219 Support column rotation axis sensor error. Linked operations
sensor error. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H6F Column slide sensor error. SM1385 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H71 Table U/D sensor error. SM0171 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Auto operation disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H72 Table long. sensor error. SM0172 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven by
Auto op. disabled. the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H73 Rotation sensor error. SM0220 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
Axis operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H74 Slide sensor error. Axis SM0221 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
505
Message Action
H H75 Detector N/A sensor error. SM0222 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H75 Table tilt sensor error. SM0445 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
Auto operation is disabled. your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H76 Ceiling long. sensor error. SM0223 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H77 Ceiling lateral sensor SM0224 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
error. Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H78 Ceiling rot. sensor error. SM0225 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked
Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H79 Collimator rotation axis SM0934 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7A FPD rotation axis sensor SM0935 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7B Floor base rotation axis SM0936 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7E Support column rotation SM0226 Support column rotation axis sensor error. Linked
sensor error. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7F Column slide sensor error. SM1386 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H81 Tabletop vertical axis SM0173 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
backup sensor error. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H82 Table long. sensor error. SM0174 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Auto op. disabled. by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H83 Rotation backup sensor SM0227 C-arm rotation axis backup sensor error. Contact your
error. Canon Medical Systems service representative. Operations
are not restricted.
No. 2B308-307EN
506
Message Action
H H83 Table lat. sensor error. SM0175 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
Auto operation disabled. cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H84 Slide backup sensor error. SM0228 C-arm slide axis backup sensor error. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H84 Table rot. sensor error. SM0176 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
Auto operation disabled. cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H85 Detector N/A backup SM0229 The FPD near-away movement axis backup sensor error.
sensor error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Operations are not restricted.
H85 Tabletop tilt axis backup SM0446 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
sensor error. your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H86 Ceiling longitudinal backup SM0230 Ceiling longitudinal movement axis backup sensor error.
sensor error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Operations are not restricted.
H87 Ceiling lateral backup SM0231 Ceiling lateral movement axis backup sensor error. Contact
sensor error. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Operations are not restricted.
H88 Ceiling rotational backup SM0232 Ceiling rotation axis backup sensor error. Contact your Canon
sensor error. Medical Systems service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H89 Collimator rotation axis SM0937 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
backup sensor error cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H8A FPD rotation axis backup SM0938 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H8B Floor base rotation axis SM0939 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
backup sensor error Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H8C Detector U/D backup SM0234 The X-ray beam up/down movement mechanism section of
sensor error. the Ω-arm does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-
positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H8D Tube U/D backup sensor SM0233 The X-ray beam up/down movement mechanism section of
error. the Ω-arm does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-
positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H8E Support column rot. SM0235 Backup sensor error for the support column rotation
backup sensor error. mechanism section. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative. Operations are not restricted.
H8F Comp. filter sensor error. SM0236 Compensation filter sensor error. The support unit can be
Filter op. disabled. operated normally. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H92 Main console switch error. SM0184 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
507
Message Action
H H92 Short mode. Support unit SM0237 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
op. is limited. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-positioning
and rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H92 Table U/D Movement SM0177 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
sw/Trigger sw error. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-positioning
and stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H93 Collimator error. SM1211 An error related to the X-ray beam limiting device has
Collimator op. is limited. occurred. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H93 Main console switch error. SM0185 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H93 Table step-slide SM0178 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
test/Override switch error. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-positioning
and stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H94 Collimator error. SM0238 Error related to the X-ray beam limiting device. The operation
Collimator op. is limited. of the X-ray beam limiting device is disabled. The support unit
can be operated normally. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H94 Image console switch SM0186 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
H94 MAG switch error. SM0179 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H95 A04 PWB error. SM0239 Error related to the X-ray beam limiting device. The operation
Collimator op. is limited. of the X-ray beam limiting device is disabled. The support unit
can be operated normally. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H95 Table control switch error. SM0447 The Step-sliding test button or the Override button is
defective.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H96 MCPWB err Support unit SM1387 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
& collimator op. Limited your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H97 A01 PWB error. Support SM0240 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
unit op. is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H97 Console Control PWB SM0187 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
hardware err. Cons
disabled.
H97 Table PWB hardware SM0180 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
error. Operation is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H98 VME bus error. Support SM0241 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
unit op. is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H99 Console Control PWB SM0188 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
hardware err. Cons
disabled.
H99 Support unit fatal error. SM0242 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
Op. is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H99 Table PWB hardware SM0181 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
error. Operation is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
508
Message Action
H HA1 In-room console relay SM1201 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HA2 In-room console relay SM1202 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HA3 tableside console switch SM1203 Image operations cannot be performed from the tableside
error console. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
HA4 satellite console switch SM1204 Image operations cannot be performed from the satellite
error console. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
HA5 In-room console CAN SM1205 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HA6 In-room console relay SM1206 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB memory error. examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HB4 MAG switch error. SM1207 Image FOV size switching error. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
HB7 In-room console relay SM1208 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HB9 In-room console relay SM1209 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
Heart apex is not found on heart SM0815 Perform tracing again.
contours.
Heart apex is not found on SM0817 Confirm that the image is the correct analysis target.
L-side image.
Heart contour reached borders SM0876 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
of image. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Heart contour too small for SM0834 Perform tracing again so that a larger contour can be
centerline analysis. obtained.
Heart contour too small for SM0835 Perform tracing so that a large contour can be obtained.
radial analysis.
Heart wall motion result cannot SM0890 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
be calculated. recommended that tracing be performed again.
HSIP error. Switching to backup SM0102 Data cannot be stored in or read from the RAID. Immediately
fluoroscopy. contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. Other SM0501 After completion of high-speed biplane fluoroscopy, continue
ops. interrupted. the interrupted process.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. SM0503 After completion of high-speed biplane fluoroscopy, operate
Operation disabled. the system.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. SM0508 The fluoroscopic image cannot be displayed simultaneously
Simultaneous disp. disabled. during high-speed biplane fluoroscopy.
HSBP rad. disabled. Mode SM0506 High-speed biplane radiography is disabled. The mode
switched to normal rad. switches to normal biplane radiography.
HV GEN. error. Use continuous SM0251 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
fluoro. Call service.
No. 2B308-307EN
509
Message Action
H HV GEN. error. Use continuous SM0249 Continuous fluoroscopy or radiography is possible. Contact
fluoro/radio. Call service. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HV GEN. error. Radiography SM0247 Use continuous fluoroscopy or pulse fluoroscopy. Contact
disabled. Call service. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HV GEN. temp. high. Select SM0248 Wait for some time or select reduced operation mode.
reduced op. or wait. SM0253
HV GEN. error. Call service. SM0254 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HV GEN. error. Change focus. SM0246 Use another focus. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
Call service. service representative.
HV GEN. error. Reset error. SM0245 Turn the system power OFF and the ON again.
I Images acq'd from another SM0891 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
plane not calibrated. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Image has no CF values set SM0918 Select a calibrated image.
Calibration is required.
Image info for ED differs from SM0854 Image information may have been overwritten during analysis.
that for ES. Do not perform simultaneous operations on the same image.
Image Proc. PWB abnormal. SM0151 If this message is displayed constantly and disturbs system
Switching to backup fluoro. operation, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Image process parameter SM0583 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
download error. Call service.
Images for 3D reconstruction do SM0387 Select the 3D reconstruction image.
not exist.
Image transfer failed. SM1194 Image transfer failed. Recheck the Auto Transfer setting in
Utility mode.
Image used in control room. SM0014 After the processing in the control room is terminated, try
Processing can't be saved. again.
Image γ curve is incorrect or SM0871 Perform analysis using another image.
does not exist.
Inappropriate radiographic SM0773 Confirm that the image is the correct analysis target.
conditions for analysis.
Incorrect data exists in normals SM0831 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
file. Systems service representative.
Incorrect FPD adjustment data SM1071 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
One-shot rad. is disabled. SM1072
Information for displaying the CU0068 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
detailed parameters of the
transfer destination does not
exist.
Insufficient free space in DB. No SM0913 Delete unnecessary photo images and then perform analysis
startup. again.
Injector is not ready. SM0137 Check the status of the injector.
Insufficient work area in local SM0912 Delete unnecessary panoramic view images or terminate
disk. No startup. printing. Then perform analysis again.
Internal error. (Code=22) SM0785 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Internal error. SM1453 Reset the hardware. For the reset procedure, refer to
Press reset SW on Console PC subsection 5.8 "System Reset".
front.
No. 2B308-307EN
510
Message Action
I Initialization of the disk failed. HP0031 Replace the disk and retry.
Insufficient space for images. SM0150 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
Create space. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for
radiography in the RAID.)
Insufficient space. Delete SM0005 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
unnecessary data. Retry. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for map
images and photo images in the RAID.)
Insufficient space. Delete SM0007 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
unnecessary images. Retry. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for map
images and photo images in the RAID.)
Internal error. SM0767 Restart the system.
Internal error. Do Partial Reset. SM0980 Perform Partial Reset.
L LIH cannot be used. SM0019 The LIH (Last Image Hold) function cannot be used.
L-side fluoro. is performed with SM0262 The X-ray conditions on the lateral side are automatically
lower X-ray cond. lowered in fluoroscopy.
(Lateral Tube) Housing SM0135 Wait until the X-ray tube cools.
overheating probable.
(Lateral tube) LM frozen. X-ray SM0101 The frozen liquid bearing is being unfrozen. Wait for some
disabled. Please wait. time and try again. If X-rays still cannot be generated,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Lateral) Do fluoroscopy before SM0256 Execute fluoroscopy for approximately 2 seconds for the
radiography. radiographic region before executing radiography.
(Lateral) Perform fluoroscopy. SM0139 Perform fluoroscopy on the lateral side.
(L CCD camera) SM0099 Communication with the lateral CCD camera is disabled.
Communication failed. Reboot SM0143 Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
system. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(L CCDIF) Test pattern SM0465 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
abnormal. Call service. representative.
(L FPD) error If fluoro/rad SM0516 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
disabled, call service. representative.
(L FPD) Temperature high. Call SM0588 FPD temperature error. Contact your Canon Medical
service. Systems service representative.
If the FPD is continuously used, the power of the FPD may
be turned OFF.
(L FPD) Temperature low. Call SM0589 FPD temperature error. Contact your Canon Medical
service. Systems service representative.
(L FPD I/F) PWB is not installed. SM0510 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
X-ray disabled. representative.
(L FPD I/F) PWB control is SM0512 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
impossible. X-ray disabled. representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
511
Message Action
L (L FPD I/F) PWB image size SM0518 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
(L FPD I/F) PWB error. SM0520 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(L FPD I/F) Test pattern error. SM0566 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Call service.
(L FPD) I/F PWB ver. SM1437 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
correction impossible.
(L OPTI/F) Communication SM0145 Communication with the lateral OPTI/F is disabled.
error. Reboot system. Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(L HV-GEN.) Communication SM0114 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
failed. X-ray disabled.
M MAP SAVE failed. SM0010 Map images could not be saved.
SM0024
1) Select the map images and then try again.
2) Delete unnecessary map images and then try again.
3) If map images cannot be saved even after the above
steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
MAP images cannot be SM0004 Map images cannot be transferred. Select an image other
transferred. than a map image and try image transfer again.
MAP → RUN failed. SM0009 The Map → Run function could not be executed.
1) Select and display the map image and then try again.
2) Confirm that the original image for the map image exists.
3) If the Map → Run function cannot be executed even after
the above steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
Mask-record DSA. Operation SM0094 Mask images are acquired during DSA. Wait until DSA is
disabled. completed and then try again.
MASK SELECT failed. Select SM0026 Only map images can be specified as masks. Save the
Map image. image to be used as a mask as a map image. Select this
map image and then try again.
Matrix size different. SM1568 Different matrix sizes are used for the mask image and for the
Switched to normal fluoro. contrast image.
Measurement application has SM1089 Wait until the application has started up.
started in control room.
Mode switched to HSBP SM0507 The mode switches to high-speed biplane fluoroscopy.
fluoroscopy.
Move arm to set position. SM0523 Move the C-arm to the set position.
SM0555
SM0999
Move arm to end position. Then SM0534 Move the C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA and
select [Set End]. SM0537 then press the Set End button.
SM0547
SM1025
Move arm to start pos. Then SM0535 Move the C-arm to the start position of rotational DSA and
select [Set Start]. SM1026 then press the Set Start button.
Move tabletop to 1st position. SM0359 Move the tabletop to the first stage and then press the [1st
Then select [1st Stage]. SM0472 Stage] button.
Move tabletop to trifurc. ROI SM0358 Move the tabletop of the catheterization table to the ROI and
Then select [Main Stage]. press the [Main Stage] button.
No. 2B308-307EN
512
Message Action
M Move table to CPR pos and shut SM1453 To prepare for CPR, set the tabletop of the catheterization
down the system. table to the horizontal position and shut down the system.
N No data in the calibration table. SM0395 Create calibration images.
No DDS trans data found. SM1451 Perform fluoroscopy/radiography again and then transfer
DDS image not sent. the image. If the error is not resolved, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
No images transferred to recon SM0391 Perform transfer again. If transfer is disabled, check the
PC. cause at the reconstruction PC.
Normals file could not be read. SM0832 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Normals file format is incorrect. SM0836 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Normals file name is incorrect. SM0819 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Normals file version is incorrect. SM0833 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
No more photo images can be SM1660 The maximum number of photo images that can be saved
created for the current study. has been reached. To save a photo image, end the study in
progress and start a new study.
No transfer. Other images SM0385 After transfer is completed, perform transfer again.
being sent to 3D WS.
No transfer. Try again after 3D SM0388 After calibration is completed, perform transfer again.
calibration.
No transfer. Try again after SM0393 After reconstruction processing for the image being
recon processing. transferred is completed, transfer the next 3D reconstruction
image.
No transfer. Currently SM0392 After reconstruction processing for the image being
transferring other images. transferred is completed, transfer the next 3D reconstruction
image.
No transfer. Try again after SM0390 After processing at the reconstruction PC is completed,
processing at recon PC. perform transfer again.
Not analysis target. Cannot SM0919 Use images selected from the same dynamic image.
start analysis. SM0926
O Offset data error. Change SM0571 Change the pulse rate for the frontal plane.
F-side fluoro pulse rate.
Offset data error. Change SM0573 Change the acquisition rate for the frontal plane.
F-side acquisition rate.
Offset data error. F-side SM0575 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is
radio/fluoro disabled. disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Only normal fluoro enabled. SM0557 The mode automatically switches to normal fluoroscopy.
Switched to normal fluoro.
Operation disabled during SM0085 Operation is disabled during concurrent display of normal
simultaneous display. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). Try again when concurrent
display is not being performed.
Operation disabled during SM0087 Operation is disabled during fluoroscopic peak tracing. Wait
PEAK-trace. until fluoroscopic peak tracing is completed and then try
again.
No. 2B308-307EN
513
Message Action
O Operation interrupted during SM0088 Operation is disabled during fluoroscopic peak tracing. Wait
PEAK-trace. until fluoroscopic peak tracing is completed and then try
again.
Operation interrupted during SM0086 Operation is disabled during concurrent display of normal
simultaneous display. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). Try again when concurrent
display is not being performed.
Operation disabled during SM0089 Stop image playback on the system monitor and then try
F-MASK/F-SUB(ADD). again.
Operation limited. Operating SM0943 The tableside console has come off the mounting rail or is not
panel disengaged. SM0954 mounted securely. Mount it to the rail securely.
OR table comm error. SM1346 A communication error with the operating table has occurred.
Operation is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
OVERLOAD Exposure disabled. SM0119 This error message is displayed in either of the following
Check technique. cases.
1) The radiographic conditions entered in manual setting
mode are not appropriate (*1) and radiography is not
possible. Correct the conditions.
*1) kV, mA, msec, focal size, acquisition rate, acquisition
time
2) The HU of the X-ray tube unit has reached 90%. The
action differs before and after radiography.
Before radiography : Radiography cannot be started with
HU90% or more. Wait until the HU
decreases to the proper level.
During radiography : Radiography can be continued to
HU100% even if this message is
displayed. After radiography is
completed, wait until the HU decreases
to the proper level.
Override button pressed. Start SM0556 The settings are cleared because the override button was
setting from 1st step. pressed. Perform setting again.
P Path not found. SM0810 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Perform fluoroscopy to SM0370 Perform fluoroscopy. The radiographic conditions are
determine rad. conds. automatically set.
Photo → Run has failed. SM1649 The Photo→ Run function could not be executed.
1) Select and display the photo image and then try again.
2) Confirm that the original image for the photo image exists.
3) If the Photo → Run function cannot be executed even after
the above steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
PHOTO SAVE failed. SM0011 Photo images could not be saved.
SM0025
1) Select an image other than a photo image and then try
again.
2) Delete unnecessary photo images and then try again.
3) If photo images cannot be saved even after the above
steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
514
Message Action
P Pixel size is outside range. SM0771 Perform calibration again.
Pixel Shift failed. SM0462 Pixel shift processing failed.
Playback disabled during SM0084 Wait until fluoroscopy/radiography is completed and then try
fluoro./radiography. again.
Playback on system monitor. SM0095 Stop image playback on the system monitor and try again.
Playback interrupted.
Preset information related to the CU0067 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
detailed parameters of the transfer representative.
destination could not be acquired.
Preset information related to the CU0069 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
detailed parameters of the transfer representative.
destination could not be saved.
Press Trigger SW. SM0531 Press the auto-positioning start button on the tableside
console or press the Arm/tabletop operation start lever of
the tableside console. Confirm that the console is
configured for the system.
Press trigSW. Arm moves to SM0521 Press the auto-positioning start button on the tableside
preset position. SM1017 console or press the Arm/tabletop operation start lever of
the tableside console. Confirm that the console is
configured for the system.
Processing failed. Change to SM0017 Fluoroscopic processing has failed. Normal fluoroscopy
normal fluoro. mode is entered. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
Q Quality may fall if rad. performed SM0756 Check the status of halation on the monitor and perform
with a lower gain. gain adjustment. It is recommended that the image quality
be checked by test shot after gain adjustment is performed.
R Rad. disabled. Confirm SM0496 Confirm that preparation for radiography is completed.
preparation completed.
Radial analysis is not possible. SM0882 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Regional analysis is not possible. SM0885 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Radiography could not be SM0759 Retry start of radiography.
started.
Retry.
Radiography could not be SM0760 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
started. representative.
Call service.
Radiography in progress. SM0090 Operation is disabled during rotational DSA. Wait until
Operation disabled. rotational DSA is completed and then try again.
Radiography in progress. SM0091 Operation is disabled during rotational DSA. Wait until
Operation interrupted. rotational DSA is completed and then try again.
Radiography is disabled. Adjust SM0548 Adjust the SID and FOV again. (*This message is displayed
SID/FOV again. when the SID or FOV is reset to a setting suitable for 3D
radiography. If the value is correct, subsequent operations
are possible.)
Radiography is performed with SM0259 The dose on the frontal side is automatically increased in
higher F-side dose. radiography.
Radiography is performed with SM0260 The dose on the lateral side is automatically increased in
higher L-side dose. radiography.
No. 2B308-307EN
515
Message Action
R Radiography is performed with SM0257 The dose on the frontal side is automatically decreased in
lower F-side dose. radiography.
Radiography is performed with SM0258 The dose on the lateral side is automatically decreased in
lower L-side dose. radiography.
Radioscopie L interrompue (minu. SM0699 Turn OFF the fluoroscopy switch.
10 mn) Red. radiosc. To resume fluoroscopy, turn ON the fluoroscopy switch.
RAID error. NONREDUNDANT SM0154 Although radiography, fluoroscopy, and playback are
possible, the RAID is highly likely to be faulty. Immediately
archive the data to external storage media. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
RAID error. Radiography and SM0152 Writing to or reading from the RAID is not possible. Contact
F-REC disabled. your Canon Medical Systems service representative
immediately.
Recon PC may not be booted. SM0389 Confirm that the reconstruction PC has been booted.
Check status.
Reference file is damaged. SM0843 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Report cannot be created. No SM0921 Set all the trace lines and then perform saving.
analysis result.
Restriction line crosses SM0766 Draw the restriction line again so that it does not cross the
centerline. traced vessel centerline.
Return arm to rotation start SM0529 Move the C-arm to the start position for rotational DSA.
position.
Return tabletop to rotation start SM0530 The tabletop position has shifted. Adjust the tabletop
position. SM1053 position.
ROI filter operation error. SM1400 ROI filter operation error. Reset the power. If the same
Call service. error message is displayed even after the power is reset,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
<Power resetting procedure>
1. Press the [Emergency Stop] button.
2. Wait for 5 seconds and then press the [Power Reset]
button on the control panel of the catheterization table.
ROI set out of range. Adjust SM0376 The ROI cannot be set. Adjust the tabletop longitudinal
table long. position. SM0476 position.
RTS com error. SM1576 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Switch to backup fluoroscopy. representative.
S Save/transfer destination not set. SM0040 The storage destination or transfer destination may not be
set. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative. Check the settings in Utility mode.
Saving is not possible after radio. SM0605 Saving is disabled before the radiographic conditions are
conds. are set. set. Perform operation again after completing the current
operation.
Saving of mask image failed. SM0018 The system has failed to register the generated mask image
as the map image. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
S-DSA in progress. Operation SM0092 The operation is disabled during stepping DSA. Wait until
disabled. stepping DSA is completed and then try again.
S-DSA in progress. Operation SM0093
interrupted.
No. 2B308-307EN
516
Message Action
S Select [Confirm Cond.]. SM0527 Press the Confirm Cond. button.
SM1019
Selection function invalid. SM1653 The Auto Table function cannot be executed using this
Cannot execute the function. system.
Set arm ceiling rot. to preset SM0351 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
angle of 0 or +90. the preset position and perform the operations again.
Set arm ceiling rotation angle to SM0549 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
preset position. SM0550 the preset position.
SM1000
SM1001
Set arm ceiling rot. angle to SM0604 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
preset rot. start pos. SM1002 the same angle as the end position setting for rotational
DSA.
Set arm main rotation angle SM0473 Operate the system after setting the C-arm rotational angle
SM1136
within ±30°. in the range of ±30 degrees.
Set arm slide angle within ±30°. SM0474 Operate the system after setting the C-arm sliding angle in
SM1137
the range of ±30 degrees.
Set arm within ±120°. Then SM0536 Set the C-arm operation angle for rotational DSA in the
SM1038
select [Set End]. range of ±120 degrees and then press the Set End button.
Set arm within ±120°. Then SM0542 Set the C-arm operation angle for rotational DSA in the
SM1037
select [Set Start]. range of ±120 degrees and then press the Set Start button.
Set arm column to 0/±90° or use SM0270 Set the C-arm support column rotation angle to 0°, 90°, or
SM0307 -90° and then tilt the tabletop.
anatomical angle control.
Alternatively, switch to anatomical angle control and then tilt
the tabletop.
Set ceiling long/lateral pos. to rot. SM0540 The longitudinal position or lateral position of the ceiling
end position. SM1029 support unit has been changed. Adjust the setting so that
the longitudinal and lateral positions of the ceiling-
suspended support column at the start position and end
position of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.
Set floorbase rot angle outside SM1139 Set the floor base rotation angle in the range between 90°
-90° to +90° range and -90°.
Set rot. Start pos. on rot. orbit SM0492 Set the start position for rotational DSA on the C-arm
including ROI. rotational orbit that passes through the radiographic position
of the ROI.
Set rotation speed again. Then SM0546 Set the C-arm movement speed for rotational DSA again.
perform radiography.
Set SID to rotation end position. SM0538 The SID has been changed. Set the SID values at the start
SM1027 position and end position of rotational DSA/DA acquisition
so that they are the same.
Set so that start & end pos. are SM0543 Set both the Start and End positions on the C-arm orbit that
same rotation orbit. SM1031 can reproduce the movement of either C-arm rotation or
C-arm sliding.
Set support column rotation angle SM0541 The support column rotation angle of the support unit has
to rot. end pos. angle. SM1105 been changed. Adjust the setting so that the support
SM1030
column rotation angles at the start position and end position
SM1124
of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.
Set tabletop long/lateral pos. to SM0539 The longitudinal position or lateral position of the
rot. end position. SM1028 catheterization tabletop has been changed. Adjust the
setting so that the longitudinal and lateral positions of the
catheterization tabletop at the start position and end position
of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.
No. 2B308-307EN
517
Message Action
S Set tabletop lateral movement to SM0298 Set the tabletop lateral movement to the center position.
center.
Set the C-arm rotation angle to 0° SM0607 Set the C-arm rotation angle to 0°.
SM1141
Set the C-arm slide angle to 0° SM0608 Set the C-arm slide angle to 0°.
SM1142
SETUP has started in Utility. SM0911 Terminate setup and then start a new analysis.
Set SID/FOV to orig pos. SM0471 Set the SID/FOV to the original position and then press the
Then press radiog. SW. SM0489 radiography switch.
SM0998
Set table sup. column rot. angle SM0297 Set the tabletop column rotation to 0°.
to 0°.
Simultaneous display failed. SM0082 Simultaneous display of the fluoroscopic image and
Switching to normal fluoro. processed fluoroscopic image (magnified fluoroscopic
image, fluoroscopic subtraction image, landmark image) has
failed. The system switches to normal fluoroscopy mode.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Slager analysis is not possible. SM0893 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Specified restriction line is SM0774 Draw the restriction line again.
incorrect.
Specified valve position is SM0816 Perform tracing again to specify the correct valve position.
incorrect.
Specifying corrected edge is not SM0781 Of the two lines drawn by vessel contour detection, select
possible. one line as the correction target.
Support unit is operating. SM0044 Release the operation switch to stop the support unit.
SM0052
Start of analysis application SM0902 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
failed. Systems service representative.
In LVA (BP) analysis, analysis for an inappropriate image
may have been attempted. Switch to an appropriate image.
Still image saving failed. SM0021 The system has failed to save the still image and the LIH
image during fluoroscopy. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Storage error. No image SM0020 The system has failed to register the fluoroscopic dynamic
recorded. image. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
SUB/UNSUB disabled for SM0013 The system has failed to generate a mask image. Normal
selected image. fluoroscopy mode is entered. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Support unit is parked. SM0122 The arm is at the park position. Some operations are
SM0123 restricted.
(Support unit) Commun. failed. SM0043 Communication with the support unit is broken. Contact
Auto-pos. is limited. SM0051 your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(Support unit) Commun. failed. SM0554 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
S-DSA disabled. representative.
(Support unit/table) Comm failed. SM0552 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Rad disabled. representative.
Switching to backup study SM0080 The study protocol was switched to the backup study
protocol protocol. Use the system as is.
No. 2B308-307EN
518
Message Action
S System startup error. Call SM0495 System startup error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service. service representative.
System disk error. Call service. SM0459 The system disk is abnormal. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
System start abnormal. Call SM0132 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
System start failed. Backup SM0097 The system has failed to start up. Restart the system.
fluoro. continued. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(System cont.) Humidity error. SM0128 Adjust the air conditioning.
Adjust air conditioning.
(System cont.) Temp. error. SM0129 Adjust the air conditioning.
Adjust air conditioning. SM0130
(System cont.) Temp. error. Sys SM0131 Adjust the air conditioning. Contact your Canon Medical
will shut down in 5 min. Systems service representative.
(SysIO) abnormal. HLC warning SM0147 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
not generated.
(SysIO) abnormal. Reboot SM0146 Reboot the system. If this message is displayed again,
system. contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
SysIO control impossible. SM1570 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
X-ray disabled. SM1571
T Target blood vessel bends too SM0777 Perform tracing again in another section of the vessel.
much.
Target blood vessel diameter is SM0772 Check the detection result.
too large.
Target images for 3D SM0386 Acquire 3D reconstruction images.
reconstruction do not exist.
Transfer of filming image failed. SM0041 The system has failed in the transfer of the printing image
(image transfer to Printing mode). Try again. If the transfer
fails again, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Table) Commun. failed. SM0065 Communication with the table is broken. Contact your Canon
Auto-pos. is limited. Medical Systems service representative.
The backup files could not be HP0064 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
transferred.
The backup files transfer HP0065 Confirm that the destination system has been started up
destination cannot be found. normally and then retry. If this message is displayed even
after retry, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
The disk is not ready. HP0032 Confirm that the disk is inserted correctly. If disk mounting is
being performed, wait until the disk mounting process is
completed before retry.
The free space for user account HP0059 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
management is insufficient.
The preset information related to PB0114 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
the (auto server) could not be
acquired.
There is no license. SM0901 Restart the system.
There are no applicable images. SM0006 There is no applicable image for this function. Wait until an
applicable image is generated and then try again.
No. 2B308-307EN
519
Message Action
T Tilt abnormal. Set tabletop tilt to SM0456 Set tilt angle of the tabletop to 0 degrees.
0°. SM0457
SM0485
Tilt disabled. Set ceiling long. to SM0455 Set the ceiling longitudinal position to a value of 30 cm or
30 cm or more. more and perform the tabletop tilting operation.
Tilt disabled. Set tabletop long. SM0453 Set the tabletop longitudinal position to 50 cm or more and
to 50 cm or more. then tilt the tabletop.
Tilt disabled. Set tabletop SM0451 Set the tabletop rotation angle to 0° and then tilt the
column rot. to 0°. tabletop.
Too few dots that specify SM0783 Draw a trace line with more vessel centerline specification
centerline. points.
Too many dots that specify SM0784 Too many vessel centerline specification points. Draw the
centerline. trace line again.
Too many segments on SM0765 Draw a trace line with fewer specification points.
centerline.
Trans in prog for 3D recon. SM0558 Perform playback after image transmission has been
Playback is interrupted. completed.
Tube bearing lube solid. SM0252 Wait for some time or select reduced operation mode.
Select reduced op. or wait.
Tube switching error. SM0458 The X-ray tube switching circuit is abnormal. Switch to the
Select other C-arm. other arm.
(Tube 1 FPD) Humidity high Call SM0751 Adjust humidity in the examination room so that it is
service. between 35% and 70%. If the error message is displayed
(Tube 1 FPD) Humidity low Call SM0752 when humidity of the examination room is within the
service. specified range, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temp. error. SM0592 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Shutdown after study. representative.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temp. high. End SM0745 Terminate the examination and contact your Canon Medical
study and call service. Systems service representative.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temperature low. SM0746 Adjust temperature in the examination room so that it is
Call service. within the range specified in the operating requirements.
If the error message is displayed when the temperature of
the examination room is within the specified range, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Humidity high SM0753 Adjust humidity in the examination room so that it is
Call service. between 35% and 70%. If the error message is displayed
(Tube 2 FPD) Humidity low Call SM0754 when humidity of the examination room is within the
service. specified range, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temp. error. SM0597 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Shutdown after study. representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temp. high. End SM0747 Terminate the examination and contact your Canon Medical
study and call service. Systems service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temperature low. SM0748 Adjust temperature in the examination room so that it is
Call service. within the range specified in the operating requirements.
If the error message is displayed when the temperature of
the examination room is within the specified range, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
520
Message Action
W W01 Set table column rotation SM0448 Set the tabletop rotation angle to 0°.
to center.
W02 Step-slide set incorrectly SM0449 Move the tabletop toward the foot-end in the longitudinal
Move tabletop to long. direction and then set step-sliding.
Center
W05 Release the step-slide SM0450 Release the Step-sliding test button.
switch.
W10 Sup. col. not at rot. set SM0265 Set the support column rotation position to the set position
pos. Op is limited. to operate the support unit.
W11 Parking. Manual SM0266 When the support unit is at the park position, the operations
operation is not possible. SM0303 are disabled in order to ensure safety. To operate the
support unit, move it to the set position.
W12 Tube not at set position or SM0267 Move the X-ray tube assembly to the set position or park
park position. SM0304 position.
W12 Interference with floor. SM0452 The catheterization table cannot be operated in the
Op. is limited. direction toward the floor. Operate the table in the direction
away from the floor.
W13 Outside isocenter area. SM0268 Carefully operate the support unit to avoid contact.
Avoid interference. SM0305
W20 Detector front touch SM0274 The support unit and catheterization table are automatically
sensor actuated. SM0309 stopped and their movements are limited. Press the
override switch, gently move the touch sensor away from
the point of contact, and correct the cause.
W21 Tube touch sensor SM0275 The support unit and catheterization table are automatically
actuated. SM0310 stopped and their movements are limited. Press the
override switch, gently move the touch sensor away from
the point of contact, and correct the cause.
W22 Arm touch sensor SM0276 Movements of the main rotation axis and slide axis of the
actuated. SM0331 support unit stop immediately. Press the override switch,
gently retract the section that is in contact, and eliminate the
cause.
W27 Touch sensor invalid. SM0281 The touch sensor signal is set as invalid. Contact your
Call service. SM0312 Canon Medical Systems service representative to set it as
valid for safety.
W30 Interfer. with tabletop. SM0282 The tabletop and the support unit are in the interference
Support unit op. is slow. SM0313 area.
W31 Interfer. with table col. SM0283 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Support unit op. is limited. SM0314 table support column. Move the C-arm in the opposite
direction.
W32 Interfer. with floor. SM0284 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Operation is limited. SM0315 floor. Move the C-arm in the opposite direction.
W33 Interfer. with wall. SM0285 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Operation is limited. SM0316 room wall. Move the C-arm in the opposite direction.
No. 2B308-307EN
521
Message Action
W W34 Interfer. with tabletop end. SM0286 The tabletop and the support unit are in the interference
Support unit op. slow. SM0317 area.
W35 Interfer. with other arm. SM0287 An interference warning is actuated. Move the support unit
Op. is limited. SM0318 outside the interference range and then perform operation.
For biplane systems, the support unit automatically stops
and cannot be operated in the direction in which contact
occurs. In this case, release hands from the operation
switch once to enable operation. Be extremely careful to
avoid contact.
W35 Colum rot brake released SM1292 Support column rotation is in progress. Be careful to avoid
watch step. catching your foot between the floor and the support unit.
W39 Tilt abnormal. Set SM0602 Set the tilt angle of the tabletop to 0 degrees.
tabletop tilt to 0°. SM0603
W3B Table operation is limited. SM1348 Movement of the operating table is restricted.
W40 Data out of range. SM0072 This position is outside the auto-positioning data save
Check position. SM0289 range. Check the position.
SM0319
W41 Unable to STORE SM0071 An attempt was made to save the data to a number for
position. Select another SM0290 which auto-positioning setting is not permitted. Specify
No. SM0320 another number.
W42 Unable to STORE SM0049
The biplane position can be saved only when the Ω-arm is
position. Move Ω-arm to SM0291 positioned within the isocenter permissible range. Move the
isocenter area. SM0321
Ω-arm into the isocenter permissible range.
W43 Unable to STORE SM0047 Auto-positioning data can be saved only when C-arm
position. Set column to SM0055 support column rotation is at the set position. Move the
90/0/-90. SM0292 support column to the set position.
SM0322
W44 Unable to STORE SM0050 The position cannot be saved when the X-ray tube
position. Move X-ray tube SM0058 assembly of the Ω-arm is not at the set position. Move the
to set position SM0293 X-ray tube assembly to the set position.
SM0323
W45 Unable to STORE SM0048 Set the support units apart and save the data again.
position. Interference area SM0056
W46 Unable to STORE SM0046 Auto-positioning data in the interference area cannot be
position. Interference SM0054 saved. Move the C-arm to the appropriate position.
area. SM0295
SM0325
W55 Push collimator lever to SM0948 Automatic control for FPD rotation is cancelled. Push the
display head-up image. SM0959 collimator lever on the tableside console. The system re-
enters automatic control mode.
No. 2B308-307EN
522
Message Action
W W92 Error in op. panel. SM1435 Failure of the tableside console or satellite console (option).
Support unit operable. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative to arrange for repair.
<Failure of the tableside console>
The arm rotation/sliding joystick is faulty. The joystick
remains tilted and does not return to the center position. As
a result, the arm is moved by simply pulling the arm/tabletop
operation start lever.
Use the optional satellite console to operate the arm until
the tableside console has been repaired.
It is still possible to operate the arm using the tableside
console, but in this case, be sure to follow the instructions
below.
If the arm starts moving by simply pulling the arm/tabletop
operation start lever, immediately tilt the arm rotation/sliding
joystick in the intended direction or release the lever to stop
arm movement.
<Failure of the satellite console (option)>
The C-arm operating lever on the satellite console is faulty.
The lever remains tilted and does not return to the center
position. As a result, the arm is moved by simply pressing
the button at the top of the lever.
Use the tableside console to operate the arm until the
satellite console has been repaired.
It is still possible to operate the arm using the satellite
console, but in this case, be sure to follow the instructions
below.
If the arm starts moving by simply pressing the button at the
top of the lever, immediately tilt the lever in the intended
direction or release the lever to stop arm movement.
W99 Service mode interlock SM0296 The system is in service mode and interlocks are
released. SM0326 overridden. This condition is dangerous. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Watch flow of contrast med. SM0375 Acquisition of contrast image is started. Start tabletop
Step tabletop to follow med. stepping operation when contrast medium reaches the
second stage.
Writing to the disk failed. HP0033 Confirm that the disk is not write-protected.
X X10 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X11 HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
X12 HV GEN. error. SM0246
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or large focus
Change focus. become possible (automatic focus selection).
Call service. After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X13 HV GEN. error. SM0246 Systems representative.
Change focus.
Call service.
No. 2B308-307EN
523
Message Action
X X14 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The large focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X15 HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
X16 HV GEN. error. SM0246
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or medium focus
Change focus. become possible (automatic focus selection).
Call service. After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X17 HV GEN. error. SM0246 Systems representative.
Change focus.
Call service.
X1D HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or large focus
become possible (automatic focus selection).
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X1E HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium and large focuses cannot be used.
Change focus. Fluoroscopy and radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X1F HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small focus become
possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
524
Message Action
X20 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The small focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X21 HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
X22 HV GEN. error. SM0246
fluoroscopy and radiography with the medium or large focus
Change focus. become possible (automatic focus selection).
Call service. After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X27 HV GEN. error. SM0246 Systems representative.
Change focus.
Call service.
X2D HV GEN. error. SM0246
Change focus.
Call service.
X2E HV GEN. error. SM0246
Change focus.
Call service.
X2F HV GEN. error. SM0246
Change focus.
Call service.
No. 2B308-307EN
525
Message Action
X X30 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X31 HV GEN. error. SM0247 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Radio. Disabled defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
X32 HV GEN. error. SM0247
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
Radio. Disabled After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Call service. Systems representative.
X33 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X34 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X38 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X39 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3A HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3C HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3D HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3E HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3F HV GEN. SM0248 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
temp. high. SM0253 disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
526
Message Action
X X40 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X41 HV GEN. error. SM0247 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Radio. Disabled defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
X42 HV GEN. error. SM0247
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
Radio. Disabled After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Call service. Systems representative.
X43 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X44 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X48 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X49 HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4A HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4C HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4D HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4E HV GEN. error. SM0247
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4F HV GEN. SM0248 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
temp. high. SM0253 disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
527
Message Action
X X52 HV GEN. SM0249 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
error. Use cont disabled to ensure safety.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X53 HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
temp. high. SM0253 fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
Select reduced safety.
op. or wait. If the system does not recover even after several minutes
have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X54 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
error. Use cont fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
fluoro./radio. safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X62 HV GEN. SM0249 If the system does not recover, the system may be
error. Use cont defective.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
Call service. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X63 HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
temp. high. SM0253 fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
Select reduced safety.
op. or wait. If the system does not recover even after several minutes
have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
528
Message Action
X X64 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
error. Use cont fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
fluoro./radio. safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X70 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use cont Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X71 HV GEN. SM0249 defective.
error. Use cont Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
fluoro./radio. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
Call service. fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X72 HV GEN. SM0251
Systems representative.
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X74 HV GEN. SM0251
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X75 HV GEN. SM0251
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X76 HV GEN. SM0251
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X77 Tube bear- SM0252 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
ing lube solid. Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Use reduced If the system does not start up after 15 minutes, press
op. or wait. [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
529
Message Action
X X79 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X7B HV GEN. SM0251 defective.
error. Use Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
cont. fluoro. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
Call service. fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X7C HV GEN. SM0251
Systems representative.
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X7D HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
temp. high. SM0253 Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X7E HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X80 HV GEN. SM0251 defective.
error. Use Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
cont. fluoro. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
Call service. fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X81 HV GEN. SM0251
Systems representative.
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X82 HV GEN. SM0251
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X84 HV GEN. SM0251
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X85 HV GEN. SM0251
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X86 HV GEN. SM0251
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
No. 2B308-307EN
530
Message Action
X X87 Tube bear- SM0252 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
ing lube solid. Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Use reduced If the system does not start up after 15 minutes, press
op. or wait. [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X89 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X8B HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery. If the
Call service. system does not recover, insufficient cooling water is a
likely possibility.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
X8C HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X8D HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
temp. high. SM0253 Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
531
Message Action
X X8E HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X92 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery. If the
Call service. system does not recover, insufficient cooling water is a
likely possibility.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
X96 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
532
Message Action
X X99 HV GEN. error. SM0254 Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X9A HV GEN. error. SM0254 defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] and then complete the study.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X9B HV GEN. error. SM0254
Systems representative.
Call service.
X9D HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XA0 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XA1 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XA3 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XA4 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XA7 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XA8 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XA9 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XAF HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XB0 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XB1 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XB3 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XB5 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Call service. disabled to ensure safety.
Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
533
Message Action
XB8 HV GEN. error. SM0254 Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
XBB HV GEN. error. SM0254 defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] and then complete the study.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
XBC HV GEN. error. SM0254
Systems representative.
Call service.
XBE HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XBF HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XC0 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XC1 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XC2 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XC3 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XC4 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XC5 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
XC6 HV GEN. error. SM0254
Call service.
X-ray exposure sw error in exam SM0383 Turn OFF the X-ray exposure switch for radiography and
room. Reboot system. fluoroscopy and reboot the system.
X-ray exposure sw error in SM0384 If the same message is displayed again after the system is
control room. Reboot system. rebooted, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
No. 2B308-307EN
534
INFX-8000F/B, INFX-8000F/Y, INFX-8000F/P pre-operational check table MM/DD Examination room No.
Name of person performing the checks: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Confirm that the operating environmental conditions are satisfied.
Confirm that each unit has been cleaned and sterilized.
Confirm that the control switches are not stained.
Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
Confirm that there is no object that may cause interference within the operation
ranges of the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor suspension unit.
Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature
increase.
Confirm that no error message is displayed on the system console monitor.
Confirm that communication with the patient in the examination room is
possible using the intercom microphone.
Confirm that the tableside console is located at the registered position.
Confirm that the drive power of the support unit and catheterization table is
turned OFF when the Emergency stop button is pressed.
In the emergency stop status, confirm that the drive power can be turned ON
using the Power reset button of the catheterization table.
Confirm that the FPD touch sensor operates normally.
Confirm that the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor operates normally.
Confirm that the C-arm touch sensor operates normally. (CAS-810A)
Confirm that the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor-suspension
unit operate normally, that operation is smooth, and that there is no backlash,
abnormal sound, or unusual smell.
Confirm that fluoroscopy and radiography can be performed (with an absorbing
object positioned on the catheterization table).
Confirm that the LEDs of the X-ray tube assembly Ready indicator and the
X-ray ON indicator light at the correct timings.
Confirm that an appropriate brightness is set by the ABC function.
Confirm that the FOV size can be switched during fluoroscopy.
Confirm that no abnormal sound is generated during X-ray exposure (such as
a rotation sound from the X-ray tube assembly).
Confirm that X-ray generation can be stopped at any given point in time.
Confirm that the functions assigned to the function buttons of the footswitch
can be performed.
Confirm that the emergency power supply cable is prepared. (*1)
Confirm that the battery of the wireless footswitch is charged. (*1)
Confirm that the green LED of the wireless footswitch lights. (*1)
Confirm that the orange LED or red LED of the wireless footswitch does not
light. (*1)
No. 2B308-307EN
535
LEGAL MANUFACTURER